Mitsubishi Electric GT15 Connection Manual Download Page 727 | Manualshive

Page: 727 / 864

background image

22. MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION

22.3 GOT Side Settings

22 - 13

17

ROBOT

CONT

ROLLER

CONN

E

C

T

ION

18

CNC CONNECTION

19

ENER

GY M

EASU

RIN

G

UNIT/ELEC

TRIC M

UL

TI

-

MEA

S

UR

IN

G IN

STRUM

EN

T

CON

NEC

TION

20

GOT

MUL

T

I-

DROP

CONNECTION

21

M

U

LT

IP

LE

-G

T1

4,

GT

12

,

GT

11

, G

T10

CO

NNEC

TIO

N FUNCTION

22

MUL

T

I-CHANNE

L

FUNC

TION

23

F

A

TRANSP

A

R

ENT

FUNCT

ION

22.3.3 Determining the connection type and channel No. (System selection)



Determining the connection type

(1) GT16

For GT16, the combinations of the bus or network connection, the Ethernet connection, and the serial
connection are available as shown in the following table.

(Continued to next page)

Connection type

Reference

Bus/network connection

Bus connection

5. BUS CONNECTION

MELSECNET/H connection (PLC to PLC network)

9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)

10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK)

CC-Link IE Controller Network connection

11. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION

CC-Link IE Field Network connection

12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION

CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)

13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION)

CNC connection(MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC
network))

18.2.2 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network)

CNC connection(CC-Link connection (intelligent device station))

18.2.3 CC-Link connection (intelligent device station)

Ethernet connection

Ethernet connection

8. ETHERNET CONNECTION

Robot controller connection

17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION

CNC connection (Ethernet connection)

18.2.4 Ethernet connection

Third party PLC connection (Ethernet connection)

Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 1

• 4. CONNECTION TO OMRON PLC 4.3 Ethernet Connection

Non-Mitsubishi Electric Products 2

• 6. CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC

6.3 Ethernet Connection

• 7. CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC

7.3 Ethernet Connection

• 10. CONNECTION TO ALLEN-BRADLEY PLC

10.3 Ethernet Connection

• 14. CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC

14.3 Ethernet Connection

Microcomputer connection (Ethernet)

Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals

• 3. MICROCOMPUTER CONNECTION (ETHERNET)

MODBUS

®

/TCP connection

Microcomputer, MODBUS Products, Peripherals

• 5. MODBUS(R)/TCP CONNECTION

«
...
725
726
727
728
729
...
»

Summary of Contents for GT15

Page 1: ...URING INSTRUMENT CONNECTION INSTRUMENT CONNECTION GOT MULTI DROP CONNECTION GOT MULTI DROP CONNECTION MULTIPLE GT14 GT12 GT11 GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION MULTIPLE GT14 GT12 GT11 GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION BUS CONNECTION DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION ETHERNET CONNECTION MELSECNET H CONNECTIO...

Page 2: ......

Page 3: ...can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction If a communication fault including cable disconnection occurs during monitoring on the GOT communication between the GOT and PLC CPU is suspended and the GOT becomes inoperative For bus connection The CPU becomes faulty and the GOT becomes inoperative For other than bus connection The GOT becomes inoperative A system where the GOT is used sh...

Page 4: ...tive type touch panel If you touch the display section simultaneously in 2 points or more the switch that is located around the center of the touched point if any may operate Do not touch the display section in 2 points or more simultaneously Doing so may cause an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction When programs or parameters of the controller such as a PLC that is monitored by the GO...

Page 5: ... failure or malfunction Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the communication unit option function board or multi color display board onto from the GOT Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction Before mounting an optional function board or Multi color display board wear a static discharge wrist strap to prevent the...

Page 6: ... Failure to do so may corrupt data within the CF card When removing a SD card from the GOT GT14 make sure to support the SD card by hand as it may pop out Failure to do so may cause the SD card to drop from the GOT and break When removing a CF card from the GOT make sure to support the CF card by hand as it may pop out Failure to do so may cause the CF card to drop from the GOT and break When inst...

Page 7: ...ing can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT Not doing so can cause a fire failure or malfunction The module has an ingress prevention label on its top to prevent foreign matter such as wire offcuts from entering th...

Page 8: ...n a communication delay or interruption may occur depending on the network environment and remote control of control equipment cannot be performed normally in some cases Before using the above functions to perform remote control fully grasp the circumstances of the field site and ensure safety WARNING When power is on do not touch the terminals Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction C...

Page 9: ...ct dispose of it without using Before touching the unit always touch grounded metal etc to discharge static electricity from human body etc Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction Replace battery with GT15 BAT GT16 GT15 or GT11 50BAT GT14 GT12 GT11 GT10 by Mitsubishi electric Co only Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion Dispose of used battery promptly Keep...

Page 10: ... with the backlight replaceable by the user Not doing so can cause a burn from heat of the backlight CAUTION When disposing of the product handle it as industrial waste When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste When disposing of batteries separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations For details of the battery directive in EU member states refer to the User s...

Page 11: ...adapter 1 19 1 3 7 Installing a unit on another unit Checking the unit installation position 1 20 1 4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 27 1 4 1 GOT connector specifications 1 27 1 4 2 Coaxial cable connector connection method 1 30 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 1 31 1 4 4 Setting the RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor 1 34 1 5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment 1 3...

Page 12: ... 1 Connection to Remote I O Station in MELSECNET H Network System 4 8 4 1 1 Direct CPU connection Direct CPU connection to the remote I O station 4 8 4 1 2 Computer link connection Connection to serial communication module mounted on remote I O station 4 9 4 1 3 Ethernet connection Connection to Ethernet module mounted on remote I O station 4 10 4 2 Direct CPU Connection 4 11 4 2 1 When using one ...

Page 13: ...s 5 32 5 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 5 32 5 3 2 Communication detail settings 5 32 5 4 Precautions 5 36 5 4 1 GT15 C EXSS 1 GT15 C BS 5 36 5 4 2 Turning the GOT ON 5 36 5 4 3 Powering OFF the GOT reapplying the power OFF to ON 5 37 5 4 4 Reset switch on GOT 5 37 5 4 5 Powering OFF or resetting the PLC 5 37 5 4 6 Position of the GOT 5 37 5 4 7 When the GOT is bus conn...

Page 14: ...7 12 7 2 6 Connecting to QnACPU QnASCPU type 7 13 7 2 7 Connecting to ACPU AnCPU type 7 15 7 2 8 Connecting to ACPU AnSCPU type A0J2HCPU A2CCPUC 7 16 7 3 Connection Diagram 7 17 7 3 1 RS 232 cable 7 17 7 3 2 RS 422 cable 7 19 7 4 GOT Side Settings 7 21 7 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 7 21 7 4 2 Communication detail settings 7 21 7 5 PLC Side Setting 7 24 7 5 1 Connecti...

Page 15: ... in Ethernet port FXCPU FX3GE 8 53 8 4 13 Connecting to Display I F CNC C70 8 55 8 4 14 Connecting to CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module 8 57 8 4 15 Connecting to PERIPHERAL I F Built in Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU 8 59 8 5 Precautions 8 62 9 MELSECNET H CONNECTION PLC TO PLC NETWORK 9 1 Connectable Model List 9 2 9 1 1 PLC Motion controller CPU 9 2 9 1 2 MELSECNET H network ...

Page 16: ...settings 11 9 11 3 3 Routing parameter setting 11 10 11 4 PLC Side Setting 11 11 11 4 1 Connecting to MELSEC iQ R Series 11 11 11 4 2 Connecting to C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series 11 15 11 4 3 Connecting to MELSEC Q L 11 19 11 5 Precautions 11 25 12 CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12 1 Connectable Model List 12 2 12 1 1 PLC Motion controller CPU 12 2 12 1 2 CC Link IE Field Network comm...

Page 17: ... 13 29 13 4 8 Connecting to MELSEC L series with CC Link Ver 1 compatible 13 33 13 4 9 Connecting to MELSEC L series with CC Link Ver 2 compatible 13 34 13 4 10 Connecting to CC Link module QnA Series 13 36 13 4 11 Connecting to CC Link module A Series 13 40 13 5 Precautions 13 48 14 CC Link CONNECTION Via G4 14 1 Connectable Model List 14 2 14 1 1 PLC Motion controller CPU 14 2 14 1 2 CC Link mod...

Page 18: ...g FREQROL F700 700P series 15 41 15 5 9 Connecting FREQROL F700PJ series 15 43 15 5 10 Connecting FREQROL A700 series 15 44 15 5 11 Connecting FREQROL A800 F800 series 15 46 15 5 12 Connecting a sensorless servo FREQROL E700EX series 15 47 15 5 13 Connecting MD CX522 K A0 15 48 15 5 14 Station number setting 15 49 15 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 15 50 15 7 Precautions 15 53 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CO...

Page 19: ...n 18 5 18 2 4 Ethernet connection 18 6 18 3 Connection Diagram 18 7 18 3 1 RS 232 cable 18 7 18 4 GOT Side Settings 18 8 18 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 18 8 18 4 2 Communication detail settings 18 8 18 4 3 Ethernet setting 18 13 18 4 4 Switch setting 18 13 18 5 CNC Side Settings 18 16 18 5 1 MELSECNET 10 connection 18 16 18 5 2 CC Link ID connection 18 19 18 5 3 Ethe...

Page 20: ...Serial Multi Drop Connection Unit 20 26 20 6 1 Write the OS 20 26 20 6 2 Setting communication interface Communication settings 20 26 20 6 3 Setting switches 20 30 20 7 Setting of connection conversion adapter 20 31 20 7 1 Setting switches 20 31 20 8 Precautions 20 32 21 MULTIPLE GT14 GT12 GT11 GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 1 Connectable Model List 21 2 21 2 System Configuration 21 2 21 2 1 Connecti...

Page 21: ...igurator2 23 41 23 4 5 FR Configurator 23 43 23 4 6 FX Configurator FP FX3U ENET L Configuration tool 23 43 23 4 7 RT ToolBox2 23 44 23 4 8 NC Configurator 23 44 23 5 GOT Side Settings 23 45 23 5 1 Setting communication interface 23 45 23 6 Personal Computer Side Setting 23 48 23 6 1 Accessing by GX Works3 23 48 23 6 2 Accessing by CW Configurator 23 52 23 6 3 Accessing the PLC by the GX Developer...

Page 22: ... 23 85 23 7 1 Precautions common to each software 23 85 23 7 2 When using GX Works3 GX Works2 GX Developer 23 87 23 7 3 When using MT Developer MT Works2 23 89 23 7 4 When using MR Configurator MR Configurator2 23 90 23 7 5 When using FR Configurator 23 90 INDEX REVISIONS ...

Page 23: ...GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Electric Products for GT Works3 Stored in DVD ROM SH 080868ENG 1D7MC2 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Electric Products 1 for GT Works3 Stored in DVD ROM SH 080869ENG 1D7MC3 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Electric Products 2 for GT Works3 Stored in DVD ROM SH 080870ENG 1D7MC4 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Microcomputer...

Page 24: ...nual Number Model code GT15 User s Manual Stored in DVD ROM SH 080528ENG 1D7M23 Manual Name Packaging Manual Number Model code GT14 User s Manual Stored in DVD ROM JY997D44801 09R823 Manual Name Packaging Manual Number Model code GT12 User s Manual Stored in DVD ROM SH 080977ENG 1D7ME1 Manual Name Packaging Manual Number Model code GT11 User s Manual Stored in DVD ROM JY997D17501 09R815 GT11 Handy...

Page 25: ... Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Electric Products for GT Works3 Connecting Mitsubishi Electric products to the GOT Connecting multiple controllers to one GOT Multi channel function Establishing communication between a personal computer and a controller via the GOT FA transparent function Obtaining information of Non Mitsubishi Electric products applicable to the GOT GOT1000 Series Connection ...

Page 26: ...16 Handy GOT User s Manual GT15 User s Manual GT14 User s Manual GT12 User s Manual GT11 User s Manual GT11 Handy GOT User s Manual GT10 User s Manual Configuring the gateway function GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3 Configuring the MES interface function GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT Works3 Configuring the extended function and option function GOT1000 Se...

Page 27: ...eviation of GT1562 VNBA GT1562 VNBD GT155 GT1555 V Abbreviation of GT1555 VTBD GT1555 Q Abbreviation of GT1555 QTBD GT1555 QSBD GT1550 Q Abbreviation of GT1550 QLBD GT15 Abbreviation of GT1595 GT1585 GT157 GT156 GT155 GT145 GT1455 Q Abbreviation of GT1455 QTBDE GT1455 QTBD GT1450 Q Abbreviation of GT1450 QMBDE GT1450 QMBD GT1450 QLBDE GT1450 QLBD GT14 Abbreviation of GT1455 Q GT1450 Q GT1275 GT127...

Page 28: ... 25P Ethernet communication unit GT15 J71E71 100 MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 MELSECNET 10 communication unit GT15 75J71LP23 Z 1 GT15 75J71BR13 Z 2 CC Link IE Controller Network communication unit GT15 J71GP23 SX CC Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15 J71GF13 T2 CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 GT15 75J61BT13 Z 3 Interface converter unit GT15 75IF900...

Page 29: ...50PSGW For GT14 GT14 50PSCB GT14 50PSGB GT14 50PSCW GT14 50PSGW For GT12 GT11 70PSCB GT11 65PSCB For GT11 GT11 50PSCB GT11 50PSGB GT11 50PSCW GT11 50PSGW GT11H 50PSC For GT10 GT10 50PSCB GT10 50PSGB GT10 50PSCW GT10 50PSGW GT10 40PSCB GT10 40PSGB GT10 40PSCW GT10 40PSGW GT10 30PSCB GT10 30PSGB GT10 30PSCW GT10 30PSGW GT10 20PSCB GT10 20PSGB GT10 20PSCW GT10 20PSGW Protective cover for oil GT05 90P...

Page 30: ...ith the simulation function GX Simulator Abbreviation of SW D5C LLT E EV type ladder logic test tool function software packages SW5D5C LLT EV or later versions GX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C GPPW E EV SW D5F GPPW E type software package GX LogViewer Abbreviation of SW DNN VIEWER E type software package PX Developer Abbreviation of SW D5C FBDQ E type FBD software package for process control MT...

Page 31: ...shi Electric India Pvt Ltd SCHNEIDER Abbreviation of Schneider Electric SA SICK Abbreviation of SICK AG SIEMENS Abbreviation of Siemens AG RKC Abbreviation of RKC INSTRUMENT INC HIRATA Abbreviation of Hirata Corporation MURATEC Abbreviation of Muratec products manufactured by Muratec Automation Co Ltd PLC Abbreviation of programmable controller Temperature controller Generic term for temperature c...

Page 32: ... 2 Applicable model name Shows GT16 Shows GT15 Shows GT11 Shows GT11 BUS Shows GT10 Shows GT11 SERIAL Shows GT1020 GT1030 input power supply 24V Shows GT1020 GT1030 input power supply 5V Shows GT105 GT104 Indicates the location of related content Indicates the operation steps Indicates the setting items displayed on the software and GOT screen 1 2 3 Refers to the information required Refers to inf...

Page 33: ...cribed with an illustration Indicates the connection diagram number of cables to be prepared by the user Refer to the connection diagram section in each chapter Indicates the commercially available cable models that can be used Indicates the maximum distance between the PLC and GOT 1 Connect the RS 422 conversion cable FA CNV2402CBL to the MELSEC Q 2 Connect the option GT16 C02R4 9S to GT16 3 Conn...

Page 34: ...A 32 ...

Page 35: ...UTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 1 1 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface 1 3 1 2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the GOT 1 16 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 18 1 4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 27 1 5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment 1 35 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 40 ...

Page 36: ... the standard monitor OS communication driver option OS project data and communication settings are properly written onto the GOT 1 2 2 Checking the project data and OS writing on GOT Attaching the communication unit and connecting the cable Mount the optional equipment and prepare connect the connection cable according to the connection type 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 4 Co...

Page 37: ...ons of MELSOFT Navigator refer to the following Help of MELSOFT Navigator 1 The color of the cells for the items which are reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT Navigator changes to green Set items which are displayed in green cells from the MELSOFT Navigator When changing in GT Designer3 refer to the following 3 2 When setting the communication interface for the connection with the iQ Works unta...

Page 38: ...on Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting dialog box appears Select the channel No to be used from the list menu 3 Refer to the following explanations for the setting POINT POINT POINT Channel No 2 to No 4 Use the channel No 2 to No 4 when using the Multi channel function For details of the Multi channel function refer to the following Mitsubishi Electric Products 22 MULTI CHANN...

Page 39: ...f Manufacturer Controller Type and I F are correct For the settings refer to the following Setting the communication interface section in each chapter Item Description Use CH Select this item when setting the channel No 2 to No 4 Manufacturer Select the manufacturer of the equipment to be connected to the GOT Type Select the type of the equipment to be connected to the GOT For the settings refer t...

Page 40: ...U DC Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q03UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU For GT16 GT15 GT12 1 2 MELSEC QnU DC Q17nD M NC DR CRnD 700 For GT14 GT11 1 MELSEC QnU DC Q17nD M NC DR For GT10 1 MELSEC QnU DC Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU Q12DCCPU V Q24D...

Page 41: ...ote I O station in the MELSECNET H network system set the type to MELSEC QnA Q QS MELDAS C6 MELSEC L L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU BT L02CPU P L06CPU P L26CPU P L26CPU PBT L02SCPU L02SCPU P NZ2GF ETB Type Model name Type Model name MELSEC A A2UCPU A2UCPU S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU S1 A2ACPUP21 S1 A2ACPUR21 S1 A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21 A1NCPU A1NCPUP21 A1NCPUR21 A2NCPU A2NCPU...

Page 42: ...J2M P8A MELSERVO J2M DU MELSERVO J2M DU MELSERVO J2S A MELSERVO J2S A MELSERVO J2S CP MELSERVO J2S CP MELSERVO J2S CL MELSERVO J2S CL MELSERVO J3 A MELSERVO J3 A MELSERVO J3 T MELSERVO J3 T MELSERVO J4 A MELSERVO J4 A MELSERVO JE A MELSERVO JE A FREQROL 500 700 800 Series FREQROL S500 FREQROL S500E FREQROL E500 FREQROL F500 FREQROL F500L FREQROL F500J FREQROL A500 FREQROL A500L FREQROL V500 FREQRO...

Page 43: ...d the position of communication unit to be mounted onto the GOT a GT16 b GT15 3rd stage Extension interface 1 Extension interface 2 Standard interface 1 RS 232 interface built in the GOT 2nd stage 1st stage Standard interface 2 USB interface built in the GOT Example In the case of the GT1685 Standard interface 3 RS 422 485 interface built in the GOT Standard interface 4 Ethernet interface built in...

Page 44: ...andard interface 3 GOT built in USB interface Front view Rear view Under view Standard interface 1 GOT built in RS 422 interface Standard interface 2 GOT built in RS 232 interface Standard interface 1 GOT built in RS 422 interface Standard interface 2 GOT built in RS 232 interface Standard interface 4 GOT built in Ethernet interface Front view Rear view ...

Page 45: ...DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION e GT11 GT11 Serial GT11 Bus Standard interface 3 GOT built in USB interface Front view Rear view Standard interface 1 GOT built in RS 422 interface Standard interface 2 GOT built in RS 232 interface Standard interface 3 GOT built in USB interface Standard interface 2 GOT built in RS 232 interface Standard interface 1 GOT bui...

Page 46: ...erface 2 GOT built in RS 232 interface Standard interface 3 GOT built in USB interface Rear view Standard interface 3 GOT built in USB interface Standard interface 1 GOT built in RS 422 interface Standard interface 2 GOT built in RS 232 interface Standard interface 1 GOT built in RS 422 interface or GOT built in RS 232 interface Standard interface 2 GOT built in RS 232 interface ...

Page 47: ... communication interfaces Set the channel and the communication driver to the interface to be used Setting 1 Select Common I F Communication Setting from the menu 2 The I F Communication Setting dialog box appears Make the settings with reference to the following explanation POINT POINT POINT When using the parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator When setting Controller Setting in GT De...

Page 48: ...function remote personal computer operation serial report function when using the serial printer hard copy function when using the serial printer or GOT extended computer 9 Used for connecting Host PC or Host modem Used for remote personal computer operation Ethernet Ethernet download gateway function or MES interface function Multi Used for Ethernet multiple connection I F The communication type ...

Page 49: ...evice that cannot be converted no corresponding device type or excessive setting ranges as In this case set the device again b When the changed Manufacturer or Controller Type does not correspond to the network The network will be set to the host station c When the Manufacturer or Controller Type is changed to None The GT Designer3 displays the device of the changed channel No as In this case set ...

Page 50: ...tween the GOT and the personal computer Click the OK button when settings are completed 3 The GOT Write tab appears on the Communicate with GOT dialog box Select the Project data OS radio button of the Write Data 4 Check mark a desired standard monitor OS communication driver option OS extended function OS and Communication Settings and click the GOT Write button POINT POINT POINT Writing communic...

Page 51: ...a and communication settings are properly written onto the GOT by reading from GOT using GT Designer3 For reading from the GOT refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual 1 Select Communication Read from GOT from the menu 2 The Communication configuration dialog box appears Set the communication setting between the GOT and the personal computer Click the OK button when ...

Page 52: ...CPU motion controller CPU A series Bus connection 1ch unit slim model GT15 75ABUS2L For A QnACPU motion controller CPU A series Bus connection 1ch unit slim model Serial communication module GT15 RS2 9P RS 232 serial communication unit D sub 9 pin male GT15 RS4 9S RS 422 485 serial communication unit D sub 9 pin female GT15 RS4 TE RS 422 485 serial communication unit terminal block RS 422 conversi...

Page 53: ...allation B drive For GOT back face CF card eject CF card extension unit GT15 CFEX C08SET For CF card installation B drive For control panel front face CF card eject Sound output unit GT15 SOUT For sound output External I O unit GT15 DIOR For the connection to external I O device or operation panel Negative Common Input Source Type Output GT15 DIO For the connection to external I O device or operat...

Page 54: ...rent consumption of the multi channel function For the specifications of the unit refer to the manual included with the unit 2 When the GOT supplies power to a barcode reader or a RFID controller from the standard interface add their consumed current Maximum value is less than 0 3 A GOT type Current supply capacity A GOT type Current supply capacity A GT1695M X 2 4 GT1595 X 2 13 GT1685M S 2 4 GT15...

Page 55: ...gateway function and a bar code reader 0 12 A to the GT1585 S Since the calculated value exceeds the capacity of the GOT such configuration is not allowed When using a bus connection unit The installation position varies depending on the bus connection unit to be used 1 Wide bus units GT15 75QBUS 2 L GT15 75ABUS 2 L GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS2 Install a bus connection unit in the 1st stage of the extens...

Page 56: ...tage position the GOT recognizes the position as the 1st stage 2 Standard size bus connection unit GT15 QBUS and GT15 ABUS A bus connection unit can be installed in any position 1st to 3rd stage of the extension interface Example Installing a bus connection unit and serial communication units Recognized as the 3rd stage of extend interface 1 Recognized as the 2nd stage of extend interface 2 Recogn...

Page 57: ...using a MELSECNET H communication unit CC Link IE Controller Network communication unit CC Link IE Field Network communication unit CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 The installed stage number of communication units installed on the next stage of MELSECNET H communication unit CC Link IE Controller Network communication unit CC Link IE Field Network communication unit or CC Link communicatio...

Page 58: ...Z are not applicable Example When installing a MELSECNET 10 communication unit and a serial communication unit When using an Ethernet communication unit An Ethernet communication unit can be installed in any position 1st to 3rd stage of the extension interface For GT16 the Ethernet communication unit is not applicable Use the Ethernet interface built in the GOT Example When installing an Ethernet ...

Page 59: ...t or multimedia unit Install the video input unit RGB input unit video RGB input unit RGB output unit or multimedia unit at the 1st stage of the extension interface These units cannot be used if installed in the 2nd or higher stage When any of these units is used the communication units indicated below must be installed in the 2nd stage of the extension interface Example When installing a video in...

Page 60: ...n unit is physically installed in the 2nd stage position the GOT recognizes the position as the 1st stage When using CF card unit or CF card extension unit Install the CF card unit or CF card extension unit on the extension interface at the last The following figures show how to install the CF card unit Recognized as the 3rd stage of extension interface 1 Recognized as the 2nd stage of extension i...

Page 61: ...the procedure to check the GT15 hardware version refer to the GT15 User s Manual 2 The terminal block MC1 5 9 ST 3 5 or corresponding product of the cable side is packed together with the GT1030 GT1020 2 Connector pin arrangement GOT Hardware version 1 Connector type Connector model Manufacturer GT16 9 pin D sub male inch screw fixed type 17LE 23090 27 D4C DDK Ltd GT1595 X 17LE 23090 27 D4CK GT158...

Page 62: ... together with the GT1030 GT1020 2 Connector pin arrangement GOT Connector type Connector model Manufacturer RS 422 conversion unit 9 pin D sub female M2 6 millimeter screw fixed type 17LE 13090 27 D2AC DDK Ltd GT16 1 14 pin female HDR EC14LFDT1 SLE Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co Ltd GT14 9 pin D sub female M2 6 millimeter screw fixed type 17LE 13090 27 D3AC DDK Ltd GT12 GT115 Q GT105 Q GT104 Q GT1030 GT1...

Page 63: ...lding tool contact Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co Ltd 3 The terminal block MC1 5 9 ST 3 5 or corresponding product of the cable side is packed together with the GT1030 GT1020 2 Connector pin arrangement GOT Hardware version 1 Connector type Connector model Manufacturer GT16 2 14 pin female HDR EC14LFDT1 SLE Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co Ltd GT14 9 pin D sub female M2 6 millimeter screw fixed type 17LE 13090 27 D...

Page 64: ...the BNC connector Plug shell Outer sheath External conductor Insulating material Internal conductor Structure of the coaxial cable 1 Remove the external sheath of the coaxial cable with dimensions as shown below 2 Pass the nut washer gasket and clamp through the coaxial cable as shown on the left and loosen the external conductor 3 Cut the external conductor insulting material and internal conduct...

Page 65: ...sing the terminating resistor setting switch 1 The default setting is Disable For RS 422 485 communication unit RS 232 485 signal conversion adapter For details refer to the following 1 4 4 Setting the RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor GT16 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch 1 The default setting is Disable For GT1685M S GT14 Set the terminating resistor ...

Page 66: ...Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch GT105 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch GT104 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch Terminating resistor selector switch Terminating resistor selector switch Terminating resistor selector switch Terminating resistor selector switch ...

Page 67: ...GE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION GT1030 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch GT1020 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch Terminating resistor selector switch Terminating resistor selector switch ...

Page 68: ...g the function using the utility function of the GOT main unit refer to the following manual GT14 User s Manual 8 2 Utility Function List Setting the 2 wire 4 wire terminating resistor setting switch POINT POINT POINT RS 232 485 signal conversion adapter For details on the RS 232 485 signal conversion adapter refer to the following manual GT14 RS2T4 9P RS 232 485 Signal Conversion Adapter User s M...

Page 69: ...TION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 1 5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment Verify the GOT recognizes controllers on Communication Settings of the Utility Channel number of communication interface communication drivers allocation status Communication unit installation status For details on the Utility refer to the following manual GT User s Manual When using GT16 GT12 For GT16 1 After powering up ...

Page 70: ...3 The Communication Settings appears 4 Verify that the communication driver name to be used is displayed in the communication interface box to be used 5 When the communication driver name is not displayed normally carry out the following procedure again 1 1Setting the Communication Interface 3 4 ...

Page 71: ...ERNET CONNECTION For GT15 GT14 or GT11 1 After powering up the GOT touch Main Menu Communication setting from the Utility 2 Touch Communication setting The screen on the left is not displayed on GT11 3 The Communication Setting appears 4 Verify that the communication driver name to be used is displayed in the box for the communication interface to be used 5 When the communication driver name is no...

Page 72: ...ting from the Utility 2 Touch Standard I F on Comm Setting 3 The Standard I F appears 4 Verify that the communication driver name to be used is displayed in the box for the communication interface to be used 5 When the communication driver name is not displayed normally carry out the following procedure again 1 1Setting the Communication Interface 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 73: ...tility call key refer to the following GT User s Manual 3 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual GT User s Manual 4 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 ...

Page 74: ... the following manual GT User s Manual When using GT15 HINT HINT HINT Advanced alarm popup display With the advanced alarm popup display function alarms are displayed as a popup display regardless of whether an alarm display object is placed on the screen or not regardless of the display screen Since comments can be flown from right to left even a long comment can be displayed all For details of t...

Page 75: ...heck function If this check ends successfully it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection Display the I O check screen by Main Menu For GT16 GT12 Display the I O check screen by Main menu Self check I O check For GT15 GT14 GT11 Display the I O check screen by Main menu Debug self check Self check I O check For details on the I O check refer to the following manual...

Page 76: ...heck ends successfully it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection Display the communication monitoring function screen by Main Menu Comm Setting Comm Monitor For details on the communication monitoring function refer to the following manual GT10 User s Manual Operation of communication monitoring function screen Main Menu Touch Comm Setting Touch Communication se...

Page 77: ...ELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 network system The communication status between the GOT and the MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 network system can be confirmed by the Utility screen of the GOT For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen refer to the following manual GT16 User s Manual Basic Utility GT15 User s Manual POINT POINT POINT Communication unit for displaying network module status Use ...

Page 78: ...T For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen refer to the following manual GT16 User s Manual Basic Utility GT15 User s Manual 3 For CC Link IE Field Network system The communication status between the GOT and CC Link IE Field Network can be confirmed by the utility screen of the GOT For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen refer to the following manual GT16...

Page 79: ...stem The communication status between the GOT and the CC Link System can be confirmed by the Utility screen of the GOT For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen refer to the following manual GT16 User s Manual Basic Utility GT15 User s Manual POINT POINT POINT CC Link communication unit when network module status display is made When displaying the network module status use the...

Page 80: ...ommunication configuration Ethernet and Connection Test to display PING Test 3 When abnormal communication At abnormal communication check the followings and execute the Ping command again Mounting condition of Ethernet communication unit Cable connecting condition Confirmation of Communication Settings IP address of GOT specified by Ping command POINT POINT POINT Ethernet diagnostics of GX Develo...

Page 81: ...W TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Confirming the communication state on the GOT For GT16 GT14 PING Test can be confirmed by the Utility screen of the GOT For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen refer to the following manual GT16 User s Manual Basic Utility GT14 User s Manual ...

Page 82: ...net multiple connection Total No of the faulty connected equipment is stored POINT POINT POINT When monitoring GS230 on Numerical Display When monitoring GS230 on Numerical Display check mask processing with data operation tab as the following For the data operation refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Screen Design Manual Numerical Display Data Operation tab Device b15 to b8 b7 to b0 GS230 ...

Page 83: ...GOT special register GS GS231 bit 0 GS231 bit 1 GS231 bit 2 GS231 bit 3 Device PLC No b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 GS231 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 GS232 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 GS233 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 GS234 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 GS235 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65...

Page 84: ...rk No station No notification The network No and station No of the GOT in Ethernet connection are stored at GOT startup If connected by other than Ethernet 0 is stored Device Description CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 GS376 GS378 GS380 GS382 Network No 1 to 239 GS377 GS379 GS381 GS383 Station No 1 to 64 ...

Page 85: ... Check on GX Developer Check if the PLC CPU recognizes the GOT For bus connection QCPU Q mode only Using the System monitor of GX Developer check if the PLC CPU recognizes the GOT or not For the GX Developer operation method refer to the following manual GX Developer Version Operating Manual 1 Check the Module Name I O Address and Implementation Position The display example is based on GX Develope...

Page 86: ...s connected correctly in Loop test of GX Developer For the GX Developer operation method refer to the following manual Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network 2 Check the Receive direction error station The display example on GX Developer Version 8 GX Developer Diagnostics MELSECNET II 10 H diagnostics Startup procedure Loop test ...

Page 87: ...s performed the data link correctly 1 For MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 network system Check if the GOT is performed the data link correctly in Other station information For the GX Developer operation method refer to the following manual Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network a Check Communication status of each station and Data Link status of each station The di...

Page 88: ...e status display The display example on GX Developer Version 8 GX Developer Diagnostics CC IE Control diagnostics CC IE Control Network Diagnostics 3 For CC Link system Use Monitoring other station of the GX Developer to check if the GOT is correctly performed the data link For the GX Developer operation method refer to the following manual CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual QJ61BT11...

Page 89: ... 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 1 6 5 Check on GX Works2 For CC Link IE Field Network system Use CC IE Field diagnostics of GX Works2 to check if the GOT is correctly performed the data link For the GX Works2 operation method refer to the following manual MELSEC Q CC Link IE Field Network Master Local Module User s Manual GX Works2 diagnostics CC IE Fie...

Page 90: ...esting method refer to the following manual CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual Checking the wiring state of the CC Link dedicated cable For CC Link system only Check if the CC Link dedicated cable is connected correctly to all the modules in the CC Link system Perform the line test from the master station of the CC Link System to check the wiring state of the CC Link dedicated cable Fo...

Page 91: ... DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 1 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 1 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 1 9 MELSECNET H CONNECTION PLC TO PLC NETWORK 9 1 10 MELSECNET 10 CONNECTION PLC TO PLC NETWORK 10 1 11 CC Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11 1 12 CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12 1 13 CC Link CONNECTION INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION 13 1 14 CC Link CONNECTION Via G4 14 1 ...

Page 92: ......

Page 93: ...CTION 6 DIRECT CONNEC TION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CON NECTION 2 1 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 1 MELSEC iQ R RnMT 2 8 2 2 MELSEC iQ F 2 9 2 3 MELSEC QnU DC Q17nD M NC DR CRnD 700 2 10 2 4 MELSEC L 2 11 2 5 MELSEC QnA Q QS MELDAS C6 2 12 2 6 MELSEC Q Multi Q Motion 2 13 2 7 MELSEC A 2 14 2 8 MELSEC FX 2 15 2 9 MELSEC WS 2 16 ...

Page 94: ...the controller actually used When a non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored 2 1 MELSEC iQ R RnMT 2 2 MELSEC iQ F 2 3 MELSEC QnU DC Q17nD M NC DR CRnD 700 1 2 4 MELSEC L 2 5 MELSEC QnA Q QS MELDAS C6 2 2 6 MELSEC Q Multi Q Motion 3 2 7 MELSEC A 2 8 MELSEC FX 2 9 MELSEC WS 1 The PLC names differ depending on the ...

Page 95: ...file register ER is selected Intelligent function module Unit top I O Set when the buffer memory BM is selected Set the head I O number of the buffer memory for the intelligent function module Set the first 2 digits of the 3 digit head I O number Unit No Set when the buffer memory G is selected Set the head I O number of the buffer memory for the intelligent function module Set the first 2 digits ...

Page 96: ... type resulting in delay of the object display 3 Setting the device by inputting directly from the keyboard When setting the device by inputting directly from the keyboard set the items as follows For devices except BM and G For device BM and CPU No 0 For device BM and CPU No 1 to 4 For device G and CPU No 0 For device G and CPU No 1 to 4 Connection method Monitoring target Direct CPU connection C...

Page 97: ...4 to b7 of the buffer memory Example The monitor value is 0002H when monitoring BM0 4321H as mask type 2 BM0 0010H when writing input value 4321H to BM0 0000H as mask type 2 For 32 bits Monitor and write only b4 to b7 and b20 to 23 of the buffer memory Example The monitor value is 00060002H when monitoring BM0 87654321H as mask type 2 BM0 00500010H when writing input value 87654321H to BM0 0000000...

Page 98: ... of the buffer memory Example The monitor value is 00650021H when monitoring BM0 87654321H as mask type 5 BM0 00650021H when writing input value 87654321H to BM0 00000000H as mask type 5 g Mask type 6 For 16 bits Monitor and write only b8 to b15 of the buffer memory Example The monitor value is 0043H when monitoring BM0 4321H as mask type 6 BM0 2100H when writing input value 4321H to BM0 0000H as ...

Page 99: ...pecification Specify the module No No 0 to No 7 of the special function unit or special function block directly to monitor or write when setting the devices b Indirect specification 1 Specify the module No of the special function unit or special function block indirectly to monitor or write when setting the devices by using the 16 bit GOT internal data register GD10 to GD25 When specifying the sta...

Page 100: ...19 Step relay block BLS BLS0 to BLS511 Link special relay SB 1 SB0 to SB9A61FFF Hexadecimal number Remote input RX RX0 to RX3FFF Remote output RY RY0 to RY3FFF Link relay LB LB0 to LB7FFF Bit specified word device Except the timer counter retentive timer and index register Z Setting range of each word device Word device Data register D 1 D0 to D10117631 Decimal number Special data register SD SD0 ...

Page 101: ... B B0 to B7FFF Hexadecimal Timer Contact TT TT0 to TT1023 Decimal Coil TC TC0 to TC1023 Counter Contact CT CT0 to CT1023 Coil CC CC0 to CC1023 Long counter Contact LCT LCT0 to LCT1023 Coil LCC LCC0 to LCC1023 Special relay SM SM0 to SM9999 Retentive timer Contact SS SS0 to SS1023 Coil SC SC0 to SC1023 Link special relay SB SB0 to SB7FFF Hexadecimal The bit specification of the word device except T...

Page 102: ...ntation Bit device Input X X0 to X3FFF Hexadecimal Output Y Y0 to Y3FFF Internal relay M 5 10 M0 to M61439 Decimal Latch relay L L0 to L32767 Annunciator F F0 to F32767 Link relay B B0 to B9FFFF Hexadecimal Timer 5 Contact TT TT0 to TT32767 Decimal Coil TC TC0 to TC32767 Counter 5 Contact CT CT0 to CT32767 Coil CC CC0 to CC32767 Special relay SM SM0 to SM2255 Retentive timer 5 Contact SS SS0 to SS...

Page 103: ... device No must be set in multiples of 16 Device name Setting range Device No representation Bit device Input X X0 to X3FFF Hexadecimal Output Y Y0 to Y3FFF Internal relay M 5 M0 to M61439 Decimal Latch relay L L0 to L32767 Annunciator F F0 to F32767 Link relay B B0 to BEFFF Hexadecimal Timer 5 Contact TT TT0 to TT32767 Decimal Coil TC TC0 to TC32767 Counter 5 Contact CT CT0 to CT32767 Coil CC CC0...

Page 104: ...possible from QS001CPU 12 For GT14 GT11 and GT10 the controller type is as follows GT14 GT11 MELSEC QnA Q MELDAS C6 GT10 MELSEC QnA Q Device name 6 7 11 Setting range Device No representation Bit device Input X X0 to X3FFF Hexadecimal Output Y Y0 to Y3FFF Internal relay M 8 M0 to M32767 Decimal Latch relay L L0 to L32767 Annunciator F F0 to F32767 Link relay B B0 to B7FFF Hexadecimal Timer 8 Conta...

Page 105: ...Y Y0 to Y1FFF Internal relay M 12 M0 to M32767 Decimal Latch relay L L0 to L32767 Annunciator F F0 to F32767 Link relay B B0 to B7FFF Hexadecimal Timer 12 Contact TT TT0 to TT32767 Decimal Coil TC TC0 to TC32767 Counter 12 Contact CT CT0 to CT32767 Coil CC CC0 to CC32767 Special relay SM 9 SM0 to SM2047 Retentive timer 12 Contact SS SS0 to SS32767 Coil SC SC0 to SC32767 Step relay S S0 to S32767 L...

Page 106: ...ay M M0 to M32767 Decimal Latch relay L L0 to L32767 Annunciator F F0 to F32767 Link relay B B0 to B7FFF Hexadecimal Timer Contact TT TT0 to TT32767 Decimal Coil TC TC0 to TC32767 Counter Contact CT CT0 to CT32767 Coil CC CC0 to CC32767 Link special relay SB SB0 to SB7FF Hexadecimal The bit specification of the word device except Index register Z Buffer memory Setting range of each word device Wor...

Page 107: ...et When monitoring or changing settings by any online equipment is required set a keyword referring to the following a When setting the keyword only Select a protection level by the initial letter of the keyword All operation protect Set a keyword with the initial letter A D to F or 0 to 9 Incorrect write read protect Set a keyword with the initial letter B Incorrect write protect Set a keyword wi...

Page 108: ...al Decimal Logic input byte LD LD0 to LD3 Decimal Logic input word LW LW0 to LW1 Decimal Device name Input position 1 to 8 Module number 1 to 12 Device name Bit position 0 to 7 Byte number 0 to 3 Device name Device number 1 to 3 Byte number 0 to 3 EFI number 1 to 2 Device name EFI number 1 to 3 Byte number 0 to 2 Device GT Designer3 Engineering software for MELSEC WS I 1 I 1 12 Dec Module number 1...

Page 109: ... 2 Q2 3 Q2 4 Q2 5 Q2 6 Q2 7 Q2 8 32 Q3 1 Q3 2 Q3 3 Q3 4 Q3 5 Q3 6 Q3 7 Q3 8 48 Q4 1 Q4 2 Q4 3 Q4 4 Q4 5 Q4 6 Q4 7 Q4 8 64 Q5 1 Q5 2 Q5 3 Q5 4 Q5 5 Q5 6 Q5 7 Q5 8 80 Q6 1 Q6 2 Q6 3 Q6 4 Q6 5 Q6 6 Q6 7 Q6 8 96 Q7 1 Q7 2 Q7 3 Q7 4 Q7 5 Q7 6 Q7 7 Q7 8 112 Q8 1 Q8 2 Q8 3 Q8 4 Q8 5 Q8 6 Q8 7 Q8 8 128 Q9 1 Q9 2 Q9 3 Q9 4 Q9 5 Q9 6 Q9 7 Q9 8 144 Q10 1 Q10 2 Q10 3 Q10 4 Q10 5 Q10 6 Q10 7 Q10 8 160 Q11 1 Q1...

Page 110: ...2 18 2 DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 9 MELSEC WS ...

Page 111: ...ING 3 1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 3 2 3 2 Access Range for Monitoring when Using Ethernet Connection 3 13 3 3 CC Link System Access Range for Monitoring 3 14 3 4 Data Link System MELSECNET B II Access Range for Monitoring 3 17 3 5 Access Range for Monitoring when Connecting FXCPU 3 18 3 6 Connection to Remote I O Station in MELSECNET H Network System 3 19 3 7 Connecti...

Page 112: ...No 65 or later in the CC Link IE controller network When connecting to the multiple CPU system the GOT can monitor CPU No 1 to No 4 Devices of other stations other than devices B and W that are allocated by the network parameter may not allow monitoring depending on their PLC CPU Monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices Examples 1 to 2 The motion controller ...

Page 113: ...connected station Even if designated the parameter is ignored Devices of other stations other than devices B and W that are allocated by the network parameter may not allow monitoring depending on their PLC CPU Monitor accessible range of other stations and setting method of monitor devices Examples 1 to 2 1 The control station and normal station correspond to the master station and local station ...

Page 114: ...r that is connected to the network to be monitored 5 When connecting to AnACPU AnNCPU Corresponding to the access range described in Bus connection 3 6 When connecting to motion controller CPU Q series CNC CNC C70 or robot controller CRnQ 700 via direct CPU connection Monitor the motion controller CPU Q series CNC CNC C70 or robot controller CRnQ 700 via the following QCPUs in the multiple CPU sys...

Page 115: ...onitoring other networks in MELSECNET 10 connection install the MELSECNET H communication unit on the GOT To monitor other networks setting of routing parameters is required For routing parameter setting refer to the following manuals Routing parameter setting for the GOT 9 MELSECNET H CONNECTION PLC TO PLC NETWORK 10 MELSECNET 10 CONNECTION PLC TO PLC NETWORK 11 CC Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONN...

Page 116: ...d A timeout error occurs due to failed monitoring Monitoring devices of other stations on the network If devices of other stations on the network system are monitored the display speed will be significantly reduced Therefore monitor the link relay B and link register W that are allocated by the network parameter Monitoring devices of other networks Bus connection CPU direct connection computer lin...

Page 117: ...fy the station network No and station No POINT POINT POINT Monitoring link device B or W For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter use the host device number even when designating devices allocated to another station Otherwise the display speed will be reduced Station to be accessed Station connected to GOT Network No 1 Network No 2 AnU 1 1 QnA 1 2 AnA 1 3 AnU 1 4 QnA...

Page 118: ...nk parameter use the host device number even when designating devices allocated to another station Otherwise the display speed will be reduced Station to be accessed Station connected to GOT Network No 1 Network No 2 Data link system QnA 1 1 AnA 1 2 QnA 1 3 AnU 2 1 QnA 2 2 AnU 2 3 AnU 2 4 QnA M QnA L1 AnA L2 QnA 1 1 Host Other 1 2 Other 1 3 Other 2 1 Other 2 2 Other 2 3 Other 2 4 Other 1 3 or Othe...

Page 119: ...tion network No and station No POINT POINT POINT Monitoring link device B or W For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter use the host device number even when designating devices allocated to another station Otherwise the display speed will be reduced Station to be accessed Station connected to GOT Network No 1 Network No 2 AnU 1 1 Q Q mode 1 2 AnA 1 3 AnU 1 4 QnA 2 1 ...

Page 120: ...ted by the link parameter use the host device number even when designating devices allocated to another station Otherwise the display speed will be reduced Station to be accessed Station connected to GOT Network No 1 Network No 2 Data link system QnA 1 1 AnA 1 2 QnA 1 3 AnU 2 1 QnA 2 2 AnU 2 3 AnU 2 4 QnA M QnA L1 AnA L2 Q Q mode 1 1 Host Other 1 2 Other 1 3 Other 2 1 Other 2 2 Other 2 3 Other 2 4...

Page 121: ...W that are allocated by network parameter NW No 1 Station number Host POINT POINT POINT For monitoring devices B and W that are allocated by the link parameter use the local device number if designating devices allocated to another station Otherwise the display speed will be reduced b Monitoring other stations other than B and W Station to be accessed Station connected to GOT Network No 1 Network ...

Page 122: ...evice station CC Link connection via G4 Accessible Not accessible Station to be accessed Station connected to GOT QnA 1 1 Q Q mode 1 2 AnA 1 3 AnN 1 4 QnA 1 1 Q Q mode 1 2 AnA 1 3 AnN 1 4 Network module 1 2 CC Link Master module 0 station Network System CC Link System Q Q mode 1 2 AnA 1 3 QnA 1 1 AnN 1 4 GOT GOT GOT GOT Image of CC Link Connection ...

Page 123: ...the GOT 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Routing parameter setting for accessing CPUs on the MELSECNET H network system or MELSECNET 10 network system Q corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network Routing parameter setting for accessing CPUs on the CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual Routing parameter setting for accessing CPUs on the ...

Page 124: ...that are allocated to the master station by CC Link parameter setting Use the following device names For devices RX RY RWw and RWr designate the addresses allocated by station number setting In the case of CC Link Ver 2 Device names to be refreshed automatically are indicated as X Y and D In the case of CC Link Ver 1 Device names to be refreshed automatically are indicated as X Y and D Monitor tar...

Page 125: ...NW No 0 PLC station number Other Station number n n Station number of another station to be monitored 0 Master station 1 64 Local station POINT POINT POINT For monitoring devices RX RY RWw and RWr that are allocated by CC Link parameter use the local device even if designating devices allocated to another station Otherwise the display speed will be reduced When using CC Link connection via G4 Q se...

Page 126: ...n transient transmission connection of several five or more as a guideline intelligent device stations GOTs and intelligent device units reduces the data communication speed To raise the data communication speed increase the CC Link system for example and do not connect five or more intelligent device stations to a single CC Link system Monitoring method Monitoring by transient transmission 2 Moni...

Page 127: ...local station The master station can be monitored However when the PLC CPU of the local station is QnACPU devices other than B and W that are allocated by the link parameter cannot be monitored Other local stations cannot be monitored 3 When connecting to the master station on the third layer The master station on the second layer and local stations on the third layer can be monitored However when...

Page 128: ...he host device number even when designating devices allocated to another station Otherwise the display speed will be reduced 3 5 Access Range for Monitoring when Connecting FXCPU The access range that can be monitored for the direct CPU connection is only the connected CPU The GOT cannot monitor other stations The access range that can be monitored for the Ethernet connection is the host and other...

Page 129: ...POINT POINT POINT 1 Connection to remote I O station of MELSECNET B II or 10 The GOT cannot be connected to the remote I O station on the MELSECNET B II data link system and MELSECNET 10 network system Connect the GOT to the remote I O station on the MELSECNET H network system 2 Connection to GT11 and remote I O station on MELSECNET H GT11 can not access the master station on MELSECNET H network s...

Page 130: ...f the PLC CPU refer to the following manual Q corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network Computer link connection 1 Connect the GOT to the serial communication module QJ71C24 QJ71C24 R2 QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 QJ71C24N R4 or modem interface module QJ71CMO mounted on the remote I O station For the cables required for connection with the serial communication module or ...

Page 131: ...ations on the MELSECNET H network with the transient transmission Therefore a longer time lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU For displaying objects with a shorter time lag execute the cyclic transmission so that the GOT can monitor link devices B and W of the remote I O station For settings required for the PLC CPU refer to the following manual Q Corres...

Page 132: ...s the monitoring target in the network setting of the device setting dialog box GT16 GT15 GT14 only In this case the GOT monitoring is performed by transient transmission of the CC Link IE Field Network Therefore a longer time lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU For displaying objects with a shorter time lag execute the cyclic transmission so that the GO...

Page 133: ...POINT POINT POINT Connection between GT11 GT10 and head module of CC Link IE Field Network GT11 GT10 can not access the master station on CC Link IE Field Network GT11 GT10 can access only the connected host station head module Restrictions on connection to head module The GOT does not allow the clock of the master station to be set in the clock setting of the utility function The master station c...

Page 134: ...3 24 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3 7 Connection to the Head Module of CC Link IE Field Network System ...

Page 135: ... Station in MELSECNET H Network System 4 8 4 2 Direct CPU Connection 4 11 4 3 CC Link Connection Intelligent Device Station 4 18 4 4 CC Link Connection Via G4 4 20 4 5 MELSECNET H and MELSECNET 10 Connections Network Systems 4 22 4 6 CC Link IE Controller Network Connection Network System 4 23 4 7 Ethernet Connection 4 24 4 8 Connection to the Redundant Type Extension Base Unit 4 25 4 9 Q Redundan...

Page 136: ...CPU QJ71LP21 25 QJ71BR11 QJ71E71 100 QJ61BT11N Station No 1 Multiplexed remote sub master station Standby system System B Q25PRHCPU QJ71LP21 25 QJ71BR11 QJ71E71 100 QJ61BT11N Station No 2 remote I O station Tracking cable QJ72LP25 25 QJ71C24N The GOT monitors the control system PLC CPU When an error occurs in System A System B switches from standby system to control system Monitor target MELSECNET...

Page 137: ... Via G4 MELSECNET H connection MELSECNET 10 connection Network system 4 5 MELSECNET H and MELSECNET 10 Connections Network Systems CC Link IE Controller Network connection Network system 4 6 CC Link IE Controller Network Connection Network System Ethernet connection 4 7 Ethernet Connection Connection to the redundant type extension base unit 1 Computer link connection Serial communication module m...

Page 138: ...remote sub master station GOT1 Direct CPU connection GOT3 Ethernet connection GOT2 Computer link connection Remote I O station Ethernet module Serial communication module Standby system Control system MELSECNET H remote I O network Multiplexed remote sub master station GOT1 Direct CPU connection GOT3 Ethernet connection GOT2 Computer link connection Remote I O station Ethernet module Serial commun...

Page 139: ...monitoring target to the PLC CPU in the control system 2 Intelligent device station Master station GOT1 Standby master station AJ65BT G4 S3 CC Link GOT2 Control system Standby system Master station Standby master station Control system Standby system GOT1 CC Link GOT2 GOT Station No 3 normal station MELSECNET H PLC to PLC network MELSECNET H mode or MELSECNET 10 mode Station No 1 control station S...

Page 140: ...ial communication module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit Ethernet connection Ethernet module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit CC Link connection intelligent device station CC Link module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit CC Link connection Via G4 CC Link module mounted on the redundant type extension base unit CC Link module Serial communication m...

Page 141: ...ted to the standby system data written to a device are overwritten by the data of the control system failing to be reflected In this case when data are written to a device in the standby system normally the system alarm 315 Device writing error Correct device is not detected 6 For monitoring the QCPU redundant system when connecting to MELSECNET H use QCPU of function version D or later with the u...

Page 142: ...or using GT11 set the device for link devices B and W of the host station set in the MELSECNET H network and execute the cyclic transmission For details refer to the following manual Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I Q network 3 Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs the multiplexed remote sub ...

Page 143: ...ECNET H network system Therefore a longer time lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU For displaying objects with a shorter time lag or using GT11 set the device for link devices B and W of the host station set in the MELSECNET H network and execute the cyclic transmission For details refer to the following manual Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System ...

Page 144: ...cyclic transmission For details refer to the following manual Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I Q network 3 Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs the multiplexed remote sub master station switched to the control system takes over the master operation of MELSECNET H Since the GOT monitors the m...

Page 145: ...ntrol system after system switching takes over the host station operation Since the GOT monitors the control system the monitoring target is automatically changed to other station POINT POINT POINT To monitor the control system without Q redundant setting If the system switching occurs when the Q redundant setting is not made the GOT cannot change the monitoring target at the occurrence of system ...

Page 146: ...control system CPU module after system switching continues the monitoring Different from the case using one GOT no cable reconnection is required POINT POINT POINT To automatically change the monitoring target after system switching using one GOT make the Q redundant settings 4 9 Q Redundant Setting Setting item Settings Model Controller Type GT16 GT15 GT12 MELSEC QnA Q QS MELDAS C6 GT14 GT11 MELS...

Page 147: ... the standby system PLC CPU is overwritten by the device value transferred from the control system to the standby system even if the GOT writes to the standby system PLC CPU Numerical input Ascii input Script Recipe or others As countermeasures to the above perform the following Display a monitor screen which indicates that the connected PLC CPU is the standby system on a GOT when connecting the G...

Page 148: ...ndby system 1 When connecting to the control system the monitor screen displays a message calling a touch switch operation by which the screen switches to the next screen 2 When connecting to the standby system the monitor screen displays a message calling the reconnection of the connection cable 1 When connecting to the control system 2 When connecting to the standby system GOT Control system Sys...

Page 149: ... not use PLC CPU devices for the screen switching device If used the Status Observation operation of the GOT may be disabled since the device data of the PLC CPU is overwritten by the device value transferred with the redundant system tracking function 2 Set the Status Observation Make the setting so that the base screen 1 is displayed when the connected PLC CPU is the standby system SM1515 is OFF...

Page 150: ...t Select Object Comment Display Bit Comment and set Comment Display Bit Device Style tab Device SM1515 Shape None Comment tab Basic Comment Comment Display Type Text ON The operation status is control system Touch the screen to display the next screen Comment Display Type Text OFF The operation status is standby system Reconnect the PLC connection cable to the control system CPU 1 Device Style tab...

Page 151: ...uch switch for shifting the screen to the next screen with a screen touch when the connected PLC CPU is the control system SM1515 is ON Select Object Switch Go To Screen Switch and set the screen switching function Set the same size for the touch switch as the base screen size so that touching any place of the screen enables the switch operation Next Screen tab Screen Type Base Go To Screen Fixed ...

Page 152: ...jects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU For displaying objects with a shorter time lag set the device for RX RY RWw RWr of the host station set in the CC Link network and execute the cyclic transmission For details refer to the following 3 3 CC Link System Access Range for Monitoring Setting item Settings Model Controller Type MELSEC QnA Q QS MELDAS C6 Device setting Network setting Ot...

Page 153: ...ystem switching occurs the CC Link does not switch the station No 0 of the master station and the station No 1 of the standby master station on the network The CC Link module of the new control system after system switching takes over the control as the standby master station Since the GOT monitors the master station the monitoring target is not automatically changed to the new control system afte...

Page 154: ... Only master station can be monitored in GT11 and GT10 The setting of GT Designer3 is not necessary Setting item Settings Model Controller Type GT16 GT15 GT12 MELSEC QnA Q QS MELDAS C6 GT14 GT11 MELSEC QnA Q MELDAS C6 1 GT10 MELSEC QnA Q 1 Device setting Network setting Host 2 Q Redundant Setting Do not set the item Monitor target Power supply module MELSECNET H remote I O network GOT Network No 0...

Page 155: ...ching occurs the CC Link does not switch the station No 0 of the master station and the station No 1 of the standby master station on the network The CC Link module of the new control system after system switching takes over the control as the standby master station Since the GOT monitors the master station the monitoring target is not automatically changed to the new control system after system s...

Page 156: ...s the network module station No 2 changes from the normal station to the sub control station and takes over the control of the MELSECNET H network system Since the GOT monitors the station of the specified station number the monitoring target cannot be changed to the station No 2 in response to the system switching As a countermeasure create a screen to monitor the PLC CPU of the control system by...

Page 157: ... the station number as the other station 3 Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When system switching occurs the network module station No 2 changes from a normal station to the sub control station and the system with the module takes over the control of the CC Link IE Controller Network as the control system Since the GOT monitors the control system the moni...

Page 158: ...rol system without Q redundant setting Only GT16 GT15 and GT14 When system switching occurs Ethernet module station No 2 takes over the control of the Ethernet network system as the control system Since the GOT monitors the station of the specified station number the monitoring target cannot be changed to the station No 2 in response to the system switching As a countermeasure create a screen to m...

Page 159: ...ension base unit 1 Connection method Connect the GOT to the serial communication module QJ71C24N mounted on the redundant type extension base unit For details refer to the following 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 2 GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows 1 GT14 and GT11 are not compatible with MELSEC QS 3 Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the sys...

Page 160: ...ETHERNET CONNECTION 2 GT Designer3 setting Set GT Designer3 as follows 1 GT14 is not compatible with MELSEC QS 3 Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs the GOT automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU switched to the control system Setting item Settings Model Controller Type GT16 GT15 GT12 MELSEC QnA Q QS MELDA...

Page 161: ...is case the GOT monitoring is performed by transient transmission of the CC Link network system Therefore a longer time lag occurs for displaying objects compared with directly monitoring the PLC CPU For displaying objects with a shorter time lag set the device for RX RY RWw RWr of the host station set in the CC Link network and execute the cyclic transmission For details refer to the following 3 ...

Page 162: ...ng Set GT Designer3 as follows 1 GT14 and GT11 are not compatible with MELSEC QS 3 Monitoring target change when system switching occurs in a redundant system When the system switching occurs the GOT automatically changes the monitoring target to the PLC CPU switched to the control system Setting item Settings Model Controller Type GT16 GT15 GT12 MELSEC QnA Q QS MELDAS C6 GT14 GT11 MELSEC QnA Q ME...

Page 163: ...T14 GT12 GT11 are applicable to built in serial interface only Item Contents Model CH1 to CH4 Select a tab of the CH No for the Q redundant setting 2 Target at its own Station 0 FF Select this item to monitor the control system as a host station In Ethernet connection not available even when selected Pair No 1 NW No Set the network No 1 to 225 for each of pair numbers 1 to 64 Upper row Setting for...

Page 164: ... to the control system when the system is switched When making the Q redundant setting for MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 or Ethernet connections check the station Nos of network modules before the setting If the settings of the Q redundant setting and the actual network module station Nos are not matched the GOT fails to automatically change the monitoring target to the control system when the system i...

Page 165: ...an change the monitoring target to the control system PLC CPU on the same monitor screen To achieve this the script of the GOT monitors the special relay SM1515 Control system identification flag of the PLC CPU and stores the station number of the latest control system into the station number switching device Restrictions Some objects do not allow the station number to be switched GT Designer3 Ver...

Page 166: ...ormation SW70 of MELSECNET H turns ON in the project specified by selecting Common Status Observation Create the status observation in the project on the Project tab POINT POINT POINT Setting for the status observation function For the status observation function hexadecimals cannot be used To use the status observation function set the N W No and the station No of the PLC CPU in Unsigned BIN For ...

Page 167: ...ab screen specified by selecting Screen Screen Property select the item Switch Station No to validate the station number changing function Make this setting for each monitor screen 5 Change the station number switching device value in the script By selecting Common Script Script create a script for each monitor screen that checks the SM1515 status of the current monitor station and if it is OFF st...

Page 168: ...nection 1 Set the station number switching device Select Common Controller Setting Station No Switching and set the internal device GD100 as the station number switching device Do not use a device of PLC CPU as a screen switching device Since the device information is transferred by the tracking transfer function of the redundant system the status observation may be disabled Connected module Netwo...

Page 169: ... tab POINT POINT POINT Setting for the status observation function For the status observation function hexadecimals cannot be used To use the status observation function set the N W No and the station No of the PLC CPU in Unsigned BIN For the status observation function set Unsigned BIN for Storing Device Example When N W No 1 and Station No 1 0101H Set 257 When N W No 10 and Station No 10 0A0AH S...

Page 170: ...tation number to the station number switching device and the switch for shifting to the monitor screen on the screen 1 To make this setting select Object Switch Switch The following shows an example of setting GD100 257 0101H Network No 1 Station No 1 and base screen 2 to one switch Base screen 2 is the actually monitoring screen 5 Validate the station number switching function On the Basic tab sc...

Page 171: ...checks the SM1515 status of the current monitor station and if it is OFF standby system changes the station number switching device value Set the trigger type of the script as Ordinary or Sampling about 3s Screen script for Ethernet connection For the Ethernet connection create a script so that the network No and station number are set to the station switching device For Network No 1 and Station N...

Page 172: ... device 2 Overlap window 1 switching device 3 Overlap window 2 switching device 4 Overlap window 3 switching device 5 Overlap window 4 switching device 6 Overlap window 5 switching device 7 Superimpose window 1 switching device 8 Superimpose window 2 switching device Setting method For MELSECNET H connection MELSECNET 10 connection System configuration example 1 MELSECNET H connection MELSECNET 10...

Page 173: ...ns ON in the project specified by choosing Common Status Observation Make the setting so that the station number is switched when the faulty station information GS231 from the station monitoring specified by selecting Common Status Observation turns ON Condition 1 SW70 b0 while ON When b0 is ON Station No 1 is abnormal Operation GD100 2 Screen No is changed to 2 Condition 1 SW70 b1 while ON When b...

Page 174: ...itching device value Set the trigger type of the script as Ordinary or Sampling about 3s Screen scripts for MELSECNET H connection and MELSECNET 10 connection The same script can be used for MELSECNET H connection MELSECNET 10 connection and Ethernet connection HINT HINT HINT When the MELSECNET H network is connected to the redundant system only SW56 current control station can be set as the scree...

Page 175: ...formation GS231 from the station monitoring specified by selecting Common Status Observation turns ON 3 Set monitor screens For MELSECNET H connection MELSECNET 10 connection or Ethernet connection Common Create a monitor screen with each object whose network setting is Station No 1 on Screen No 1 1 1 Create a monitor screen with each object whose network setting is Station No 2 on Screen No 2 1 2...

Page 176: ... number switching device value Set the trigger type of the script as Ordinary or Sampling about 3s Screen script for Ethernet connection The same script can be used for MELSECNET H connection MELSECNET 10 connection and Ethernet connection Script of Screen No 1 If Station 1 is not a control station the screen is changed to that of Station 2 if 1 1 b SM1515 OFF w GD100 2 Script of Screen No 2 If St...

Page 177: ...ESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 5 1 5 BUS CONNECTION 5 1 Connectable Model List 5 2 5 2 System Configuration 5 7 5 3 GOT Side Settings 5 32 5 4 Precautions 5 36 ...

Page 178: ...munication type Refer to MELSEC iQ R Series R04CPU Bus connection R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU R04ENCPU R08ENCPU R16ENCPU R32ENCPU R120ENCPU R08SFCPU R16SFCPU R32SFCPU R120SFCPU Motion controller CPU MELSEC iQ R Series R16MTCPU Bus connection R32MTCPU C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series R12CCPU V Bus connection MELSEC iQ F Series FX5U FX5UC Bus connection ...

Page 179: ...igits later than 12042 5 When a slim base is used a bus connection cannot be established Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC Q Q mode 5 Q00JCPU 1 Bus connection 3 5 2 1 Q00CPU 2 Q01CPU 2 Q02CPU 2 Q02HCPU 2 Q06HCPU 2 Q12HCPU 2 Q25HCPU 2 Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Main base Q25PRHCPU Main base Q12PRHCPU Extension base Q25PRHCPU Extension base Q00UJCPU 1 Bus ...

Page 180: ...Q02HCPU A Q06HCPU A MELSEC QnA QnACPU Q2ACPU Bus connection 1 5 2 2 Q2ACPU S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU 2 MELSEC QnA QnASCPU Q2ASCPU Bus connection 1 5 2 3 Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 MELSEC A AnCPU A2UCPU Bus connection 1 5 2 2 A2UCPU S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU S1 A2ACPUP21 S1 A2ACPUR21 S1 A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21 A1NCPU A1NCPUP21 A1NCPUR21 A2NCPU A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUR21 A2N...

Page 181: ...the extension base unit Q5 B Q6 B Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC A A0J2HCPUR21 Bus connection 1 5 2 4 A0J2HCPU DC24 A2CCPU A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24 PRF A2CJCPU S3 A1FXCPU Motion controller CPU Q Series Q172CPU 3 4 Bus connection 2 5 2 1 Q173CPU 3 4 Q172CPUN 3 Q173CPUN 3 Q172HCPU Q173HCPU Q172DCPU Q173DCPU Q172DCPU S1 Q173DCPU S1 Q172DSCPU Q173DSCPU Q170MC...

Page 182: ... unit Q3 BL Large type base unit Q3 SB Slim type main base unit Q38RB Redundant power main base unit Extension base Q5 B Model requiring no power supply module Q6 B Model requiring a power supply module QA1S6 B Small type QA base unit Q5 BL Large type base unit Model requiring no power supply module Q6 BL Large type base unit Model requiring a power supply module QA6 B Large type QA base unit QA6A...

Page 183: ...g functions use GT15 QBUS 2 GT15 75QBUS 2 L cannot be used Used for remote personal computer operation serial video display function multimedia function operation panel function external I O function RGB display function report function when using a PictBridge compatible printer hard copy function when using a PictBridge compatible printer sound output function functions with the CF card unit or C...

Page 184: ...hen using Q00JCPU or Q00UJCPU attach the bus extension connector to the extension base unit Connecting it to the main base unit is not allowed Extension base unit Bus extension connector box 1st GOT Intermediary GOT GOT Terminating station Main base unit Extension cable Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Connection cable 3 PLC Connection cable 1 GOT 1st 5 Main base Extension cable 1 Extension b...

Page 185: ...et download gateway function or MES interface function However Ethernet download gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface Communication driver Bus Q Connection cable 2 GOT intermediary 4 5 Connection cable 3 GOT terminal 4 5 Max distance Option device 6 7 Model Option device 6 7 Model GT15 QC06B 0 6m GT15 QC12B 1 2m GT15 QC30B 3m GT15 QC50B 5...

Page 186: ...5 10 5 BUS CONNECTION 5 2 System Configuration ...

Page 187: ... can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface Extension base unit Bus extension connector box GOT Main base unit Extension cable Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Communication driver Bus A QnA PLC Connection cable 2 GOT Max distance Main base Extension cable 1 Extension base Connection cable 1 Bus connector conversion box 2 Option device Model Main base GT15 C12NB 1 2m GT15 C30NB 3m G...

Page 188: ...ple GOTs Extension base unit Bus extension connector box 1st GOT Main base unit Connection cable 2 Extension cable 2nd GOT 3rd GOT Connection cable 3 Connection cable 4 Connection cable 1 PLC 5 Connection cable 2 GOT 1st 3 Main base Extension cable 1 Extension base Connection cable 1 Bus connector conversion box 2 Option device 6 7 Model Main base GT15 C12NB 1 2m GT15 C30NB 3m GT15 C50NB 5m GT15 7...

Page 189: ... 3 5 Max distance Option device 6 7 Model Option device 6 7 Model GT15 C07BS 0 7m GT15 C12BS 1 2m GT15 C30BS 3m GT15 C50BS 5m GT15 C100BS 10m GT15 C200BS 20m GT15 C300BS 30m 4 GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L GT15 ABUS GT15 ABUS2 Between main base and GOT 1st 6 6m Including the extension cable length Between GOT 1st and GOT 2nd 30m Between main base and GOT 2nd 36 6m Including the extension cable length...

Page 190: ...GT15 A1SC12B 1 2m GT15 A1SC30B 3m GT15 A1SC50B 5m GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L GT15 ABUS GT15 ABUS2 Between main base and GOT 5m Built into GOT GT15 C100EXSS 1 10m GT15 C200EXSS 1 20m GT15 C300EXSS 1 30m 3 GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L GT15 ABUS GT15 ABUS2 Between main base and GOT 30m Built into GOT GT15 A1SC05NB 0 45m GT15 A1SC07NB 0 7m GT15 A1SC30NB 3m GT15 A1SC50NB 5m A7GT CNB GT15 C100EXSS 1 10m G...

Page 191: ...with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit Ethernet download gateway function or MES interface function However Ethernet download gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface Extension base Extension cable Main base GT15 A1SC07B 0 7m GT15 A1SC12B 1 2m GT15 A1SC30B 3m GT15 A1SC50B 5m GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L GT15 ABUS GT15 ABUS2 Between ext...

Page 192: ...on cable 2 Extension cable 2nd GOT Connection cable 3 Communication driver Bus A QnA PLC 5 Connection cable 2 GOT 1st 3 Extension base Extension cable 1 Main base Connection cable 1 Bus connector conversion box Option device 6 7 Model Main base GT15 A1SC07B 0 7m GT15 A1SC12B 1 2m GT15 A1SC30B 3m GT15 A1SC50B 5m GT15 75ABUS2L GT15 ABUS2 GT15 C100EXSS 1 10m GT15 C200EXSS 1 20m 4 GT15 75ABUS2L GT15 A...

Page 193: ...GT15 C07BS 0 7m GT15 C12BS 1 2m GT15 C30BS 3m GT15 C50BS 5m GT15 C100BS 10m GT15 C200BS 20m GT15 C300BS 30m 4 GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L GT15 ABUS GT15 ABUS2 Between main base and GOT 1st 5m Between GOT 1st and GOT 2nd 30m Between main base and GOT 2nd 35m Built into GOT GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L GT15 ABUS GT15 ABUS2 Between main base and GOT 2nd 30m Built into GOT GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L GT15...

Page 194: ...unction modules 5 4 12 When connecting multiple GOTs Extension base unit 1st GOT Main base unit Connection cable 2 Extension cable 2nd GOT Connection cable 3 3rd GOT Connection cable 4 PLC 3 Connection cable 2 GOT 1st 2 Extension base Extension cable 1 Main base Connection cable 1 Bus connector conversion box Option device 5 6 Model Main base GT15 A1SC07B 0 7m GT15 A1SC12B 1 2m GT15 A1SC30B 3m GT1...

Page 195: ...d extension unit Ethernet download gateway function or MES interface function However Ethernet download gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface Connection cable 3 GOT 2nd 2 3 Connection cable 4 GOT 3rd 2 3 Max distance Option device 5 6 Model Option device 5 6 Model GT15 C07BS 0 7m GT15 C12BS 1 2m GT15 C30BS 3m GT15 C50BS 5m GT15 C100BS 10m ...

Page 196: ... copy function when using a PictBridge compatible printer sound output function functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit Ethernet download gateway function or MES interface function However Ethernet download gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface Power supply module GOT PLC Connection cable 2 Connection cable 1 Communicatio...

Page 197: ...GT16 by using the Ethernet interface Extension base unit Bus extension connector box GOT Main base unit Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Extension cable Communication driver Bus A QnA PLC Connection cable 2 GOT1000 Series Max distance Main base Extension cable Extension base Connection cable 1 Bus connector conversion box 1 Option device 3 Model Main base GT15 A370C12B S1 1 2m GT15 A370C25B S...

Page 198: ...ension connector box 1st GOT Main base unit Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Extension cable 2nd GOT Connection cable 3 Communication driver Bus A QnA PLC 4 Connection cable 2 GOT 1st 2 Main base Extension cable Extension base Connection cable 1 Bus connector conversion box Option device 5 6 Model Main base GT15 A370C12B S1 1 2m GT15 A370C25B S1 2 5m GT15 75ABUS2L GT15 ABUS2 GT15 A370C12B 1 2...

Page 199: ...ax distance Option device 5 6 Model GT15 C07BS 0 7m GT15 C12BS 1 2m GT15 C30BS 3m GT15 C50BS 5m GT15 C100BS 10m GT15 C200BS 20m GT15 C300BS 30m 3 GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L GT15 ABUS GT15 ABUS2 Between main base and GOT 1st 2 5m Between GOT 1st and GOT 2nd 30m Between main base and GOT 2nd 32 5m Built into GOT GT15 C07BS 0 7m GT15 C12BS 1 2m GT15 C30BS 3m GT15 C50BS 5m GT15 C100BS 10m GT15 C200BS ...

Page 200: ...4 12 When connecting multiple GOTs Extension base unit 1st GOT Main base unit Connection cable 2 Extension cable 2nd GOT 3rd GOT Connection cable 3 Connection cable 4 PLC 2 Connection cable 2 GOT 1st 1 Extension base Extension cable Main base Connection cable 1 Bus connector conversion box Option device 4 5 Model Main base GT15 A370C12B S1 1 2m GT15 A370C25B S1 2 5m GT15 75ABUS2L GT15 ABUS2 Extens...

Page 201: ...rd extension unit Ethernet download gateway function or MES interface function However Ethernet download gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface Connection cable 3 GOT 2nd 2 3 Connection cable 4 GOT 3rd 2 3 Max distance Option device 4 5 Model Option device 4 5 Model GT15 C07BS 0 7m GT15 C12BS 1 2m GT15 C30BS 3m GT15 C50BS 5m GT15 C100BS 10m...

Page 202: ...tion device 5 Model Main base GT15 A1SC07B 0 7m GT15 A1SC12B 1 2m GT15 A1SC30B 3m GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L GT15 ABUS GT15 ABUS2 Between main base and GOT 3m Built into GOT GT15 C100EXSS 1 10m GT15 C200EXSS 1 20m GT15 C300EXSS 1 30m 4 GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L GT15 ABUS GT15 ABUS2 Between main base and GOT 30m Built into GOT GT15 A1SC05NB 0 45m GT15 A1SC07NB 0 7m GT15 A1SC30NB 3m A7GT CNB 3 GT15...

Page 203: ...sound output function functions with the CF card unit or CF card extension unit Ethernet download gateway function or MES interface function However Ethernet download gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface Main base Extension cable Extension base GT15 A1SC07B 0 7m GT15 A1SC12B 1 2m GT15 A1SC30B 3m GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L GT15 ABUS GT15 A...

Page 204: ...xtension base unit Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Connection cable 3 Extension cable 1st GOT 2nd GOT Communication driver Bus A QnA PLC 5 Connection cable 2 GOT 1st 4 Main base Extension cable 1 Extension base 2 Connection cable 1 Bus connector conversion box Option device 7 8 Model Main base GT15 A1SC07B 0 7m GT15 A1SC12B 1 2m GT15 A1SC30B 3m GT15 75ABUS2L GT15 ABUS2 GT15 C100EXSS 1 10m GT...

Page 205: ...0BS 5m GT15 C100BS 10m GT15 C200BS 20m GT15 C300BS 30m 5 GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L GT15 ABUS GT15 ABUS2 Between main base and GOT 1st 3m Between GOT 1st and GOT 2nd 30m Between main base and GOT 2nd 33m Built into GOT GT15 C07BS 0 7m GT15 C12BS 1 2m GT15 C30BS 3m GT15 C50BS 5m GT15 C100BS 10m GT15 C200BS 20m 5 GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L GT15 ABUS GT15 ABUS2 Between main base and GOT 2nd 30m Built...

Page 206: ...PU type and the number of intelligent function modules 5 4 12 When connecting multiple GOTs Main base unit Extension base unit Connection cable 2 Connection cable 3 Extension cable 1st GOT 2nd GOT Connection cable 4 3rd GOT PLC 3 Connection cable 2 GOT 1st 3 Main base Extension cable 1 Extension base 2 Connection cable 1 Bus connector conversion box Option device 6 7 Model Main base GT15 A1SC07B 0...

Page 207: ...F card extension unit Ethernet download gateway function or MES interface function However Ethernet download gateway function and MES interface function can be used for GT16 by using the Ethernet interface Connection cable 3 GOT 2nd 3 4 Connection cable 4 GOT 3rd 3 4 Max distance Option device 6 7 Model Option device 6 7 Model GT15 C07BS 0 7m GT15 C12BS 1 2m GT15 C30BS 3m GT15 C50BS 5m GT15 C100BS...

Page 208: ... 1 2 I F communication setting 5 3 2 Communication detail settings 1 Bus Q 1 This range is effective when collecting a large amount of data such as logging and recipe function on other than the monitor screen However the range may affect the sequence scan time when connecting to Q00UJ Q00U Q01U Q02UCPU or Q00J Q00 Q01CPU If you want to avoid the influence on the sequence scan time do not set High ...

Page 209: ...r For example faulty station that has communication timeout can be cut from the system For details of the setting contents of GOT internal device refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Setting Stage No and Slot No POINT POINT POINT Before setting Stage No and Slot No The PLC CPU recognizes the GOT as follows QCPU Q mode Intelligent function module of 1...

Page 210: ...ple When setting 2 to Stage No and 0 to Slot No in the communication interface settings set 10 to 2nd Stage Example I O assignment when 16 points are assigned to each of all modules installed with the PLC CPU Q35B Q68B 0 1 CPU 2 3 4 Slot No 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Q65B 13 14 15 16 17 X00 to X0F X10 to X1F X20 to X2F X30 to X3F X40 to X4F X60 to X6F X70 to X7F X80 to X8F X90 to X9F X50 to X5F XA0 to XAF...

Page 211: ... or no empty I O slots are left on an extension base unit set an additional stage and assign the GOT to one of the I O slots Assigning the GOT to an empty slot on the main base unit is not allowed a When there is an empty I O slot on the extension base unit b When there are no empty I O slots on the extension base unit A1S35B 0 1 Slot No A1S65B Main base unit Extension base unit Stage No 1 Slot No...

Page 212: ... 5 4 10 1 Restrictions in overall cable length to No of GOTs 4 Power up sequence for connection of the Q4ARCPU redundant system 5 4 14 2 Power On sequence for GOT and Q4ARCPU redundant system 5 Power up sequence for cases other than 3 and 4 The GOT and PLC can both be started up whichever of these devices is turned ON first There is no specific sequence in which they are powered ON Note however th...

Page 213: ... used the reset switch on the GOT does not function 5 4 5 Powering OFF or resetting the PLC 1 When turning OFF or resetting the PLC during monitoring When turning OFF or resetting the PLC during monitoring the system alarm No 402 timeout error is generated When the PLC CPU is restored the GOT automatically resumes monitoring Use System Information to reset the alarm For the System Information refe...

Page 214: ...nsion base unit Connecting it to the main base unit is not allowed 3 When using a Q00J Q00UJ Q00 Q00U Q01 Q01U Q02UCPU When a GOT is bus connected to a Q00JCPU or Q00UJCPU number of extension stages including the GOT must be 2 or less When a GOT is bus connected to a Q00CPU Q00UCPU Q01CPU Q01UCPU or Q02UCPU number of extension stages including the GOT must be 4 or less When connecting to No of GOT...

Page 215: ...in base unit Concurrently connecting GOTs to extension connectors on both sides is not allowed 2 In the case of Q4A R CPU Q3ACPU A3 CPU A4UCPU Empty I O slots are required within the max number of extension stages 3 For A0J2HCPU Assign the GOT to the I O slots 0 to 3 of extension stage 1 4 In the case of CPUs other than 2 3 above Even if the max number of stages are used with no empty I O slots wh...

Page 216: ...rect mode and if the 1st GOT is connected to the main or extension base unit with a 5m extension cable GT15 AC50B GT15 A1SC50NB the input X of the empty I O slot cannot be used No restrictions apply when the I O control mode is the refresh mode On PLC CPUs whose I O control mode can be selected by a switch set the I O control mode to the refresh mode before use POINT POINT POINT In the cases where...

Page 217: ...ant main base unit A68RB 2 Power On sequence for GOT and Q4ARCPU redundant system Apply the power to the GOT and Q4ARCPU redundant system in the following sequence 1 Turn ON the GOT 2 After the monitor screen is displayed on the GOT turn ON the Q4ARCPU redundant system At this time a timeout is displayed on the system alarm Use System Information to reset the alarm For the system alarm refer to th...

Page 218: ...5 42 5 BUS CONNECTION 5 4 Precautions ...

Page 219: ...O MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 6 1 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 1 Connectable Model List 6 2 6 2 System Configuration 6 7 6 3 Connection Diagram 6 27 6 4 GOT Side Settings 6 30 6 5 PLC Side Setting 6 33 6 6 Precautions 6 34 ...

Page 220: ...me Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC iQ R Series R04CPU RS 232 RS 422 R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU R04ENCPU R08ENCPU R16ENCPU R32ENCPU R120ENCPU R08SFCPU R16SFCPU R32SFCPU R120SFCPU Motion controller CPU MELSEC iQ R Series R16MTCPU RS 232 RS 422 R32MTCPU C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series R12CCPU V RS 232 RS 422 MELSEC iQ F Series FX5U FX5UC RS 232 RS 42...

Page 221: ...later than 12042 Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC Q Q mode Q00JCPU RS 232 RS 422 6 2 1 Q00CPU 1 Q01CPU 1 Q02CPU 1 Q02HCPU 1 Q06HCPU 1 Q12HCPU 1 Q25HCPU 1 Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU RS 232 RS 422 3 3 Q12PRHCPU Main base Q25PRHCPU Main base Q12PRHCPU Extension base 3 3 Q25PRHCPU Extension base Q00UJCPU RS 232 RS 422 6 2 1 Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU ...

Page 222: ...U 1 L26CPU 1 L26CPU BT 1 L02CPU P 1 L06CPU P 1 L26CPU P 1 L26CPU PBT 1 L02SCPU L02SCPU P RS 232 RS 422 6 2 2 MELSEC Q A mode Q02CPU A Q02HCPU A Q06HCPU A RS 232 RS 422 6 2 1 MELSEC QnA QnACPU 3 Q2ACPU Q2ACPU S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU RS 422 6 2 3 Q4ARCPU RS 422 MELSEC QnA QnASCPU 3 Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 RS 422 6 2 3 MELSEC A AnCPU A2UCPU A2UCPU S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 ...

Page 223: ...3Q 00E or later SW6RN SV22Q 00E or later SW6RN SV43Q 00B or later 3 Use main modules with the following product numbers Q172CPU Product number K or later Q173CPU Product number J or later 4 Access via QCPU RS 232 in the multiple CPU system Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC A AnSCPU A2USCPU S1 RS 422 6 2 4 A2USHCPU S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24 R2 A1SHCPU A2SCPU 1 A2SCPU S1 1 A2SHCPU...

Page 224: ...2 6 2 4 A273UHCPU RS 422 A273UHCPU S3 A373UCPU RS 422 A373UCPU S3 A171SCPU A171SCPU S3 A171SCPU S3N A171SHCPU RS 422 A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU S1 MELSEC WS WS0 CPU0 RS 232 6 2 7 WS0 CPU1 WS0 CPU3 MELSECNET H Remote I O station QJ72LP25 25 RS 232 1 6 2 1 QJ72LP25G QJ72BR15 CC Link IE Field Network head module LJ72GF15 T2 CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module NZ2...

Page 225: ...ailable for the multiple GT14 GT12 GT11 GT10 connection function to connect up to two GOTs 21 MULTIPLE GT14 GT12 GT11 GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 6 Applicable to the QnUCPU only 7 Use the RS 232 connection model 8 Use the RS 422 connection model RS 422 connector conversion cable QCPU GOT Connection cable Communication driver Serial MELSEC PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment 5 Mod...

Page 226: ...R2 RS 232 GT01 C30R2 6P 3m 3m Built into GOT 1 GOT for 1 PLC GT15 RS2 9P GT01 RS4 M 4 GT10 C30R2 6P 3m 2 3m Built into GOT 6 L6ADP R2 FA CNV2402CBL 0 2m FA CNV2405CBL 0 5m RS 422 GT01 C30R4 25P 3m GT01 C100R4 25P 10m GT01 C200R4 25P 20m GT01 C300R4 25P 30m 30m GT16 C02R4 9S GT15 RS2T4 9P 1 GT15 RS4 9S Built into GOT GT01 RS4 M 4 GT10 C30R4 25P 3m GT10 C100R4 25P 10m GT10 C200R4 25P 20m GT10 C300R4...

Page 227: ... GT14 GT12 GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple GT14 GT12 GT11 GT10 connection function to connect up to two GOTs 21 MULTIPLE GT14 GT12 GT11 GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 6 Use the RS 232 connection model 7 Use the RS 422 connection model L02SCPU L02SCPU P RS 232 GT01 C30R2 6P 3m 3m Built into GOT 1 GOT for 1 PLC GT15 RS2 9P GT01 RS4 M 4 GT10 C30R2 6P 3m 2 3m Built into GOT 6 FA CNV2402CBL 0 2m...

Page 228: ...T12 GT11 GT10 connection function to connect up to two GOTs 21 MULTIPLE GT14 GT12 GT11 GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 5 Use the RS 422 connection model QnACPU GOT Connection cable Communication driver Serial MELSEC PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment 4 Model name Communication type Cable model Max distance Option device Model MELSEC QnA RS 422 GT01 C30R4 25P 3m GT01 C100R4 25P 10m G...

Page 229: ...ng 20 GOT MULTI DROP CONNECTION 4 GT14 GT12 GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple GT14 GT12 GT11 GT10 connection function to connect up to two GOTs 21 MULTIPLE GT14 GT12 GT11 GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 5 Use the RS 422 connection model Communication driver MELSEC A For GT10 ACPU GOT Connection cable Communication driver Serial MELSEC PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment 4 ...

Page 230: ... 8P 1m GT10 C30R4 8P 3m GT10 C100R4 8P 10m GT10 C200R4 8P 20m GT10 C300R4 8P 30m GT10 C10R4 8PC 1m GT10 C30R4 8PC 3m GT10 C100R4 8PC 10m GT10 C200R4 8PC 20m GT10 C300R4 8PC 30m 2 30m Built into GOT 4 GT10 C10R4 8P 1m GT10 C30R4 8P 3m GT10 C10R4 8PC 1m GT10 C30R4 8PC 3m 2 3m Built into GOT 4 RS 422 RS 422 connection diagram 8 30m GT16 C02R4 9S 1 GOT for 1 PLC built in port GT15 RS2T4 9P 1 GT15 RS4 ...

Page 231: ...e connected a GOT and a peripheral such as a PC with GX Works3 installed can be connected to them individually 3 Use the RS 422 connection model FX5U FX5 485ADP RS 422 RS 422 connection diagram 8 30m GT16 C02R4 9S 1 GOT for 1 Expansion adapter GT15 RS2T4 9P 1 GT15 RS4 9S Built into GOT RS 422 connection diagram 9 30m Built into GOT 4 PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment 2 Model...

Page 232: ...nection model PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment 2 Model name Expansion board Expansion adapter Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Option device Model FX5UC RS 422 RS 422 connection diagram 8 30m GT16 C02R4 9S 1 GOT for 1 PLC built in port GT15 RS2T4 9P 1 GT15 RS4 9S Built into GOT RS 422 connection diagram 9 30m Built into GOT 3 FX5 485ADP ...

Page 233: ...r 6 Use the RS 422 connection model 7 For the connection to GOT refer to the connection diagram RS 422 connection diagram 2 FXCPU Function expansion board Function adapter GOT Connection cable MELSEC FX Communication driver PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment 4 Model name Function expansion board 5 Function adapter 5 Communication type Cable model Max distance Option device Mo...

Page 234: ...OT for 1 PLC built in port GT15 RS2T4 9P 1 GT15 RS4 9S Built into GOT GT01 RS4 M 5 GT10 C10R4 8P 1m GT10 C30R4 8P 3m GT10 C100R4 8P 10m GT10 C200R4 8P 20m GT10 C300R4 8P 30m GT10 C10R4 8PC 1m GT10 C30R4 8PC 3m GT10 C100R4 8PC 10m GT10 C200R4 8PC 20m GT10 C300R4 8PC 30m GT10 C10R4 8PL 1m 2 3 30m Built into GOT 8 GT10 C10R4 8P 1m GT10 C30R4 8P 3m GT10 C10R4 8PC 1m GT10 C30R4 8PC 3m GT10 C10R4 8PL 1m...

Page 235: ...CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 6 GT14 GT12 GT11 and GT10 are available for the multiple GT14 GT12 GT11 GT10 connection function to connect up to two GOTs 21 MULTIPLE GT14 GT12 GT11 GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 7 When using function expansion boards or function adapters confirm the communication settings 6 6 Precautions Connection to FXCPU 2 When connecting with function extension board or communicat...

Page 236: ...tance Option device Model FX1S FX1N FX2N FX1N 232 BD FX2N 232 BD RS 232 GT01 C30R2 9S 3m or RS 232 connection diagram 1 15m Built into GOT 1 GOT for 1 function expansion board GT15 RS2 9P GT01 RS4 M 2 RS 232 connection diagram 4 15m Built into GOT 5 FX1N CNV BD FX2N CNV BD FX2NC 232ADP RS 232 GT01 C30R2 9S 3m or RS 232 connection diagram 1 15m Built into GOT 1 GOT for 1 function adapter GT15 RS2 9...

Page 237: ...adapters confirm the communication settings 6 6 Precautions Connection to FXCPU 2 When connecting with function extension board or communication special adapter 7 Use the RS 422 connection model PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment 5 Model name Function expansion board 6 Function adapter 6 Communication type Cable model Max distance Option device Model FX3G FX3S FX3GE RS 422 GT...

Page 238: ...e GOT Number of connectable equipment 2 Model name Function expansion board 3 Function adapter 3 Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Option device Model FX3G FX3S FX3GE FX3G 232 BD RS 232 GT01 C30R2 9S 3m or RS 232connection diagram 1 15m Built into GOT 1 GOT for 1 function expansion board GT15 RS2 9P GT01 RS4 M 1 RS 232connection diagram 4 15m Built into GOT 4 FX...

Page 239: ...connection function to connect up to two GOTs 21 MULTIPLE GT14 GT12 GT11 GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 3 When using function expansion boards or function adapters confirm the communication settings 6 6 Precautions Connection to FXCPU 2 When connecting with function extension board or communication special adapter 4 Use the RS 232 connection model PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment...

Page 240: ...e GOT Number of connectable equipment 5 Model name Function expansion board 6 Function adapter 6 Communication type Cable model Max distance Option device Model FX3U FX3UC FX3UC LT 2 RS 422 GT01 C10R4 8P 1m GT01 C30R4 8P 3m GT01 C100R4 8P 10m GT01 C200R4 8P 20m GT01 C300R4 8P 30m 30m GT16 C02R4 9S 1 GOT for 1 PLC built in port GT15 RS2T4 9P 1 GT15 RS4 9S Built into GOT GT01 RS4 M 4 GT10 C10R4 8P 1...

Page 241: ...OTs 21 MULTIPLE GT14 GT12 GT11 GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 3 When using function expansion boards or function adapters confirm the communication settings 6 6 Precautions Connection to FXCPU 2 When connecting with function extension board or communication special adapter 4 Use the RS 232 connection model PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment 2 Model name Function expansion board 3 F...

Page 242: ...ction expansion boards or function adapters confirm the communication settings 6 6 Precautions Connection to FXCPU 2 When connecting with function extension board or communication special adapter 4 Use the RS 232 connection model PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment 4 Model name Communication type Cable model Max distance Option device Model FX3UC D FX3UC DS FX3UC DSS RS 422 GT...

Page 243: ... connection model 6 Use the RS 422 connection model MELSEC WS Communication driver WSCPU GOT Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment Model name Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Option device Model MELSEC WS RS 232 WS0 C20R2 2m 2m Built into GOT 1 GOT for 1 PLC GT15 RS2 9P WS0 C20R2 2m RS 232 connection diagram 6 2 3m Built into...

Page 244: ...other than Q170MCPU MR MQ100 A motion controller CPU Q Series mounted to the multiple CPU system of the QCPU Q mode can be monitored The system configuration connection conditions and system equipment for connecting a GOT to a motion controller CPU Q Series are the same as those for connecting to the QCPU 6 2 1 Connecting to QCPU ...

Page 245: ...connection diagram 2 RS 232 connection diagram 3 GOT side 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 FX PLC side D sub 9 pin 1 3 2 6 5 8 4 7 9 GOT side FX PLC side D sub 25 pin 2 3 8 4 5 6 2 3 5 6 7 20 GOT side terminal block Untied wire color of GT10 C30R2 6P Brown Red Blue Yellow Green Purple SD RD ER DR SG RS CS NC NC RS 232 connection diagram 4 RS 232 connection diagram 5 RS 232 connection diagram 6 GOT side terminal ...

Page 246: ...low Green Black White SDA SDB RDA RDB SG RSA RSB CSA CSB GOT side terminal block Untied wire color of GT10 C R4 8P Brown Red Orange Yellow Green Black White SDA SDB RDA RDB SG RSA RSB INPUT DC5V RS 422 connection diagram 2 RS 422 connection diagram 3 RS 422 connection diagram 4 GOT side terminal block Untied wire color of GT10 C R4 25P Brown Red Orange Yellow Green Blue Purple Black White SDA SDB ...

Page 247: ... resistor selector to 330 For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT RS 422 connection diagram 5 RS 422 connection diagram 6 RS 422 connection diagram 7 GOT side terminal block United wire color of Q170MIOCBL1M A SDA SDB RDA RDB SG RSA RSB CSA CSB Yellow Dot mark Black Yellow Dot mark Red Pink Dot mark Black Pink Dot mark Red White D...

Page 248: ...et Make the settings according to the usage environment 6 4 2Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed POINT POINT POINT The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 1 1 2 I F communication setting 6 4 2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment 1 Se...

Page 249: ... speed used for communication with the connected equipment Default 115200bps When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected equipment communication is performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected equipment 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps 115200bps Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs When receiving no response after r...

Page 250: ...ption Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment Default 9600bps When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected equipment communication is performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected equipment 9600bps Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission...

Page 251: ...settings with GOT settings 6 4 2 Communication detail settings 6 5 2 GX Works2 settings Set the communication speed in GX Works2 1 Click PLC parameter Adapter Serial Setting 2 Set RS 422 485 in Adapter Type 3 Set GOT Connection in Select Function 4 Adjust Communication Speed Setting with the GOT communication setting 6 4 2 Communication detail settings POINT POINT POINT L6ADP R4 adapter For detail...

Page 252: ...ting GT1020 L L or GT1030 L to FX3G FX3S series they cannot be connected to standard built in port RS 422 and function expansion board FX3G 422 BD simultaneously Connection in the multiple CPU system When the GOT is connected to multiple CPU system the following time is taken until when the PLC runs QCPU Q mode motion controller CPU Q series 10 seconds or more MELDAS C70 18 seconds or more When th...

Page 253: ...NT MELSEC iQ F Series communication settings For details of MELSEC iQ F Series communication settings refer to the following manual MELSEC iQ F Series User s Manual Module parameter settings as a default value MELSOFT Connection If it sets up other than a default value it becomes impossible to communicate with GOT 1 Module parameter setting When using FX5 485 BD POINT POINT POINT When changing the...

Page 254: ...6 36 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6 6 Precautions ...

Page 255: ...O MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 7 1 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 1 Connectable Model List 7 2 7 2 System Configuration 7 8 7 3 Connection Diagram 7 17 7 4 GOT Side Settings 7 21 7 5 PLC Side Setting 7 24 7 6 Precautions 7 31 ...

Page 256: ...unit The RnSFCPU and the safety function module R6SFM must have the same pair version If their pair versions differ the RnSFCPU does not operate Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC iQ R Series R04CPU RS 232 RS 422 7 2 1 R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU R04ENCPU R08ENCPU R16ENCPU R32ENCPU R120ENCPU R08SFCPU 2 R16SFCPU 2 R32SFCPU 2 R120SFCPU 2 Moti...

Page 257: ... CPU system configuration Series Model name Clock Communication Refer to MELSEC Q Q mode Q00JCPU RS 232 RS 422 7 2 2 Q00CPU 1 Q01CPU 1 Q02CPU 1 Q02HCPU 1 Q06HCPU 1 Q12HCPU 1 Q25HCPU 1 Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU RS 232 RS 422 2 2 7 2 2 Q12PRHCPU Main base 2 2 Q25PRHCPU Main base Q12PRHCPU Extension base RS 232 RS 422 2 2 7 2 2 Q25PRHCPU Extension base Q00UJCPU RS 232 RS 422 7 2 2 Q00UCPU Q...

Page 258: ...the internal relay File register R Series Model name Clock Communication Refer to C Controller module Q Series Q12DCCPU V 1 2 Q24DHCCPU V 2 VG 2 Q24DHCCPU LS RS 232 RS 422 7 2 2 Q26DHCCPU LS MELSEC QS QS001CPU MELSEC L L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU BT L02CPU P L06CPU P L26CPU P L26CPU PBT L02SCPU L02SCPU P RS 232 RS 422 7 2 3 MELSEC Q A mode Q02CPU A Q02HCPU A Q06HCPU A RS 232 RS 422 7 2 4 MELSEC Qn...

Page 259: ...odules with the following product numbers Q172CPU Product number N or later Q173CPU Product number M or later 4 Only the first step can be used on the extension base unit Q52B Q55B 5 The extension base unit Q5 B Q6 B can be used 6 Use hardware version C or later software version E or later Series Model name Clock Communication Refer to MELSEC A AnSCPU A2USCPU RS 232 RS 422 7 2 8 A2USCPU S1 A2USHCP...

Page 260: ...n Refer to Motion controller CPU A Series A273UCPU RS 232 RS 422 7 2 7 A273UHCPU A273UHCPU S3 A373UCPU A373UCPU S3 A171SCPU RS 232 RS 422 7 2 8 A171SCPU S3 A171SCPU S3N A171SHCPU 2 A171SHCPUN 2 A172SHCPU 2 A172SHCPUN 2 A173UHCPU A173UHCPU S1 MELSEC WS WS0 CPU0 WS0 CPU1 WS0 CPU3 MELSECNET H Remote I O station QJ72LP25 25 RS 232 RS 422 1 7 2 2 QJ72LP25G QJ72BR15 CC Link IE Field Network head module ...

Page 261: ... 8 Use hardware version C or later software version E or later CPU series Model name 1 MELSEC iQ R Series Motion controller CPU MELSEC iQ R Series C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series 7 RJ71C24 RJ71C24 R2 RJ71C24 R4 MELSEC Q Q mode Motion controller CPU Q Series MELSECNET H remote I O station CNC C70 Robot controller CRnQ 700 QJ71C24 2 QJ71C24 R2 2 QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 QJ71C24N R4 QJ71CMO 3 QJ71...

Page 262: ...es GOT Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment Model name Serial communication module 1 Communication type Cable model Max distance Option device Model MELSEC iQ R Series RJ71C24 RJ71C24 R2 RS 232 GT09 C30R2 9P 3m or RS 232 connection diagram 1 15m Built into GOT 2 GOTs for 1 serial communication module GT15 RS2 9P RS 232 connection diagram 3 15m Built into GOT 3 ...

Page 263: ... GT12 GT11 GT10 connection function to connect up to four GOTs However when using modem interface modules or serial communication modules function version A up to two GOTs can be connected 21 MULTIPLE GT14 GT12 GT11 GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 6 Use the RS 232 connection model 7 Use the RS 422 connection model Communication driver Serial MELSEC Serial communication module QCPU Q mode GOT Connection c...

Page 264: ...MELSEC Serial communication module LCPU GOT Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment Model name Serial communication module 1 Communication type Cable model Max distance Option device Model MELSEC L LJ71C24 LJ71C24 R2 RS 232 GT09 C30R2 9P 3m or RS 232 connection diagram 1 15m Built into GOT 2 GOTs for 1 serial communication module GT15 RS2 9P GT01 RS4 M 3 RS 232 co...

Page 265: ...e RS 422 connection model Computer link module QCPU A mode GOT Connection cable Communication driver Serial MELSEC PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment Model name Computer link module 1 Communication type Cable model Max distance Option device Model MELSEC Q A mode A1SJ71UC24 R2 A1SJ71C24 R2 A1SJ71UC24 PRF A1SJ71C24 PRF RS 232 GT09 C30R2 9P 3m or RS 232 connection diagram 1 15m...

Page 266: ... Number of connectable equipment Model name Serial communication module 1 Communication type Cable model Max distance Option device Model MELSEC QnA QnACPU AJ71QC24 AJ71QC24N AJ71QC24 R2 AJ71QC24N R2 RS 232 GT09 C30R2 25P 3m or RS 232 connection diagram 2 15m Built into GOT 1 GOT for 1 serial communication module GT15 RS2 9P GT01 RS4 M 3 RS 232 connection diagram 4 15m Built into GOT 4 AJ71QC24 R4...

Page 267: ... cable GOT Number of connectable equipment Model name Computer link module 1 Communication type Cable model Max distance Option device Model MELSEC QnA QnACPU AJ71UC24 RS 232 GT09 C30R2 25P 3m or RS 232 connection diagram 2 15m Built into GOT 1 GOT for 1 computer link module GT15 RS2 9P GT01 RS4 M 3 RS 232 connection diagram 4 15m Built into GOT 4 AJ71UC24 RS 422 RS 422 connection diagram 2 500m B...

Page 268: ...Computer link module 1 Communication type Cable model Max distance Option device Model MELSEC QnA QnASCPU A1SJ71QC24 A1SJ71QC24N A1SJ71QC24N1 RS 422 RS 422 connection diagram 2 1200m Built into GOT 1 GOT for 1 serial communication module GT09 C30R4 6C 3m GT09 C100R4 6C 10m GT09 C200R4 6C 20m GT09 C300R4 6C 30m or RS 422 connection diagram 1 1200m GT16 C02R4 9S GT15 RS2T4 9P 2 GT15 RS4 9S Built int...

Page 269: ... RS 232 connection model 4 Use the RS 422 connection model Computer link module ACPU AnCPU type GOT Connection cable AJ71C24 UC24 Communication driver PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment Model name Computer link module 1 Communication type Cable model Max distance Option device Model MELSEC A AnCPU AJ71UC24 RS 232 GT09 C30R2 25P 3m or RS 232 connection diagram 2 15m Built into...

Page 270: ...Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment Model name Computer link module 1 Communication type Cable model Max distance Option device Model MELSEC A AnSCPU A0J2H A2CCPUC A1SJ71UC24 R2 A1SJ71C24 R2 A1SJ71UC24 PRF A1SJ71C24 PRF A1SCPUC24 R2 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24 PRF RS 232 GT09 C30R2 9P 3m or RS 232 connection diagram 1 15m Built into GOT 1 GOT for 1 computer link module GT15 RS2 9P RS 232 ...

Page 271: ...1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PLC side 7 3 2 6 5 4 1 8 9 NC RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS RS RTS SD TXD RD RXD DR DSR SG ER DTR CD CS CTS GOT side D Sub 9 pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PLC side 1 3 2 6 5 4 7 8 9 NC RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS CD SD TXD RD RXD DR DSR SG ER DTR RS RTS CS CTS RS 232 connection diagram 2 PLC side connector D sub 25 pin For GT16 GT15 For the GT14 GT12 GT11 ...

Page 272: ... PLC side 2 3 6 4 5 1 7 8 9 SD RD ER DR SG RS CS NC NC RD RXD SD TXD DR DSR ER DTR SG CD RS RTS CS CTS GOT side terminal block PLC side 2 3 6 4 5 1 7 8 9 RD RXD SD TXD DR DSR ER DTR SG CD RS RTS CS CTS SD RD ER DR SG RS CS NC NC RS 232 connection diagram 4 PLC side connector D sub 25 pin For GT1030 GT1020 When connecting to the Q QnA Serial Communication Module For GT1030 GT1020 When connecting to...

Page 273: ...tion diagram 1 For GT16 GT15 GT14 GT12 GT11 GT105 GT104 Serial Multi Drop Unit RS 422 connection diagram 2 For GT16 GOT side PLC side 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SDA RDA RSA CSA SG SDB RDB RSB CSB FG RDA SDA SG RDB SDB FG R GOT side PLC side 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Shell SDA1 TXD1 SDB1 TXD1 RDA1 RXD1 RDB1 RXD1 SDA2 TXD2 SDB2 TXD2 RDA2 RXD2 RDB2 RXD2 RSA RTS RSB RTS CSA CTS CSB CTS SG NC RDA RDB SDA...

Page 274: ...set the terminating resistor refer to the following 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 2 Serial communication module or computer link module side Connect the terminating resistors 330 1 4W orange orange brown on the serial communication module or computer link module side For details refer to the following manual User s Manual for the serial communication module or computer link module a Other tha...

Page 275: ...cording to the usage environment 7 4 2 Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed POINT POINT POINT The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 1 1 2 I F communication setting 7 4 2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment 1 Serial MELSEC 2 3 4 Clic...

Page 276: ...The value of Transmission Speed remains 38400bps 2 AJ71QC24 MELDAS C6 Monitor Speed GT16 only Set the monitor speed of the GOT This setting is not valid in all systems Default Normal High 1 Normal Low 2 Switch No CH1 side CH2 side Switch 1 0000H Switch 2 0000H Switch 3 0000H Switch 4 0000H Switch 5 0000H 0000H Format 1 Format Transmission Speed 2 38400bps Item Description Range Item Description Ra...

Page 277: ...Fundamentals Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment Default 19200bps 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps Data Bit Set this item when change the data length used for communication with the connected equipment Default 8bit 8bit fixed Stop Bit Specify the stop bit length for communications Default 1bit 1bit f...

Page 278: ... CPU OFF then back ON again or reset the PLC CPU 2 Connection of multiple GOTs To some serial communication module models two GOTs can be connected using both CH1 and CH2 Transmission specifications Setting Data bit 8bits Parity bit Yes Odd Stop bit 1bit Sum check Yes Transmission speed Baud rate Set the same transmission speed on both the GOT and the PLC Model Refer to Serial communication module...

Page 279: ...n specifications 2 The serial communication module operates at the transmission speed set on the GOT 3 When the value of switch setting is other than 0 the setting of Format and Transmission Speed on the GOT side are required to be changed 7 4 2 Communication detail settings Switch No Bit Description Set value 3 Positi on Specifi ed value Switch 1 b0 OFF CH1 transmiss ion settings 1 Operation sett...

Page 280: ...witch for the channel used for GOT connection and the Transmission specifications switches 1 Mode setting switch 1 The mode switch in the figure is for the AJ71QC24 N R2 R4 Model Connection of 2 GOTs Function version A Function version B QJ71C24 R2 QJ71C24N R2 R4 LJ71C24 R2 Mode setting switch 1 Description Set value Dedicated protocol Format 5 Binary mode 5 AJ71QC24N RUN CPUR W NEU ACK NAK C N P ...

Page 281: ...hin 115200bps within 230400bps in the case of A1SJ71QC24N1 R2 a controller other than GOT can be connected to the computer link module When only one device is connected to either of the interfaces a maximum transmission speed of 115200bps can be set to the one where the device is connected In this instance set SW09 to SW12 to OFF on the other side 4 This can be set only in the case of AJ71QC24N R2...

Page 282: ...1SJ71C24 PRF 8 0 2 3 5 7 8 0 2 3 5 7 8 9 0 3 4 B CD F A1SJ71UC24 R4 SCAN SCAN E SET E SIO E ST DWN MD L NEU NAK ACK C N P S PRO SIO COM MD RUN RD SD CPU SW 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 10 STATION NO 1 MODE SDA SDB RDA RDB SG FG NC RS 422 485 A1SJ71UC24 R4 1 3 2 A1SJ71UC24 R4 A1SJ71C24 R4 PULL MELSEC A1SCPU24 R2 STOP RUN RESET RESET L CLR RUN ERROR STOP RUN RESET RESET L CLR RUN ERROR MELSEC...

Page 283: ... below SW06 SW07 SW08 Data bit setting 8bits ON SW09 Parity bit setting Set ON SW10 Even odd parity setting Odd OFF SW11 Stop bit setting 1bit OFF SW12 Sum check setting Set ON Setting switch Transmission speed 1 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps SW05 OFF ON OFF SW06 OFF OFF ON SW07 ON ON ON Transmission specifications switch Setting switch Description Set value SW01 Master station Local station setting Se...

Page 284: ... R2 b A2CCPUC2 Transmission specifications switch Setting switch Description Set value SW11 Transmission speed setting Consistent with the GOT side specifications See descriptio ns below SW12 SW13 SW14 Data bit setting 8bits ON SW15 Parity bit setting Set ON SW16 Even odd parity setting Odd OFF SW17 Stop bit setting 1bit OFF SW18 Sum check setting Set ON SW19 Main channel setting RS 232 OFF SW20 W...

Page 285: ... or when resetting Therefore it takes time until the SD memory card becomes available When the GOT starts before the SD card becomes available a system alarm occurs Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual When monitoring the Q170MCPU Set CPU No to 2 in the device setting to monitor the device of the Motion CPU area CP...

Page 286: ...7 32 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7 6 Precautions ...

Page 287: ...NITORING 4 HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 1 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 1 Connectable Model List 8 2 8 2 System Configuration 8 8 8 3 GOT Side Settings 8 17 8 4 PLC Side Setting 8 22 8 5 Precautions 8 62 ...

Page 288: ...se unit The RnSFCPU and the safety function module R6SFM must have the same pair version If their pair versions differ the RnSFCPU does not operate Series Model name Clock Communication type 1 Refer to MELSEC iQ R Series R04CPU Ethernet 8 2 1 R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU R04ENCPU R08ENCPU R16ENCPU R32ENCPU R120ENCPU R08SFCPU 2 R16SFCPU 2 R32SFCPU 2 R120SFCPU 2 Moti...

Page 289: ...ly GT1455 QTBDE GT1450 QMBDE and GT1450 QLBDE Series Model name Clock Communication type 3 Refer to MELSEC Q Q mode Q00JCPU Ethernet 8 2 1 Q00CPU 1 Q01CPU 1 Q02CPU 1 Q02HCPU 1 Q06HCPU 1 Q12HCPU 1 Q25HCPU 1 Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Main base Q25PRHCPU Main base Q12PRHCPU Extension base Q25PRHCPU Extension base Q00UJCPU Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDH...

Page 290: ...E 3 Combination with the Ethernet module is restricted 8 1 2 Ethernet module Series Model name Clock Communication type 2 Refer to MELSEC QS QS001CPU Ethernet 8 2 1 MELSEC L L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU BT L02CPU P L06CPU P L26CPU P L26CPU PBT L02SCPU L02SCPU P Ethernet 8 2 2 8 2 1 MELSEC Q A mode Q02CPU A 3 Q02HCPU A 3 Q06HCPU A 3 Ethernet 8 2 1 MELSEC QnA QnACPU Q2ACPU 3 Q2ACPU S1 3 Q3ACPU 3 Q4AC...

Page 291: ...t module only the first step can be used on the extension base unit Q52B Q55B 4 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455 QTBDE GT1450 QMBDE and GT1450 QLBDE 5 When using Ethernet module the extension base unit Q5 B Q6 B can be used Series Model name Clock Communication type 4 Refer to MELSEC A AnSCPU A2USCPU Ethernet 8 2 1 A2USCPU S1 A2USHCPU S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24 R2 A1SHCPU A...

Page 292: ...1SCPU A171SCPU S3 A171SCPU S3N A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU S1 MELSEC WS WS0 CPU0 WS0 CPU1 WS0 CPU3 MELSECNET H Remote I O station QJ72LP25 25 Ethernet 8 2 1 QJ72LP25G QJ72BR15 CC Link IE Field Network head module LJ72GF15 T2 CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF ETB CC Link IE 8 2 4 Ethernet CNC C70 Q173NCCPU Ethernet 8 2 3 Robot controller CRnQ 7...

Page 293: ...nal relay File register R 2 Use B or a later function version of Ethernet module and PLC CPU CPU series Ethernet module 1 MELSEC iQ R Series Motion controller CPU MELSEC iQ R Series RJ71EN71 MELSEC Q Q mode MELSEC QS Motion controller CPU Q Series CNC C70 Robot controller CRnQ 700 QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B2 QJ71E71 MELSEC QnA AJ71QE71N3 T 2 AJ71QE71N B5 2 AJ71QE71N B2 2 AJ71QE71N T 2 AJ71QE...

Page 294: ... cable STP or unshielded twisted pair cable UTP Category 3 4 and 5 100BASE TX Shielded twisted pair cable STP Category 5 and 5e 100m Built into GOT 2 8 128 GOTs 7 recommendedto 16 units or less MELSEC Q Q mode MELSEC QS Motion controller CPU Q Series 6 QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B2 QJ71E71 Ethernet Built into GOT 2 8 9 GT15 J71E71 100 MELSEC QnA AJ71QE71N3 T AJ71QE71N B5 AJ71QE71N B2 AJ71QE71N...

Page 295: ...the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 4 For the system configuration of the Ethernet module refer to the following manuals Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Basic For QnA Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual For A Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual 5 Select one of the following Controller Type in Ethernet of GT Designer3 Ethernet ...

Page 296: ...onnection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer Ethernet module GOT Connection cable PLC CPU Ethernet FX Gateway Communication driver PLC Connection cable 1 Maximum segment length 3 GOT Number of connectable equipment Model name Ethernet module 4 5 Comm...

Page 297: ...Type in Ethernet of GT Designer3 Ethernet module FX Series FX For Ethernet of GT Designer3 refer to the following 8 3 3 Ethernet setting 6 When using an Ethernet module with the FX3UC series FX2NC CNV IF or FX3UC 1PS 5V is required 7 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455 QTBDE GT1450 QMBDE and GT1450 QLBDE 8 When using an Ethernet module with the FX3U series FX3U CNV BD F...

Page 298: ...ength 4 GOT Number of connectable equipment Model name Communication type Option device Model MELSEC iQ R Series 10 11 Ethernet Twisted pair cable 10BASE T Shielded twisted pair cable STP or unshielded twisted pair cable UTP Category 3 4 and 5 100BASE TX Shielded twisted pair cable STP Category 5 and 5e 100m Built into GOT 3 9 16 GOTs Motion controller CPU 10 11 MELSEC iQ R Series Ethernet C Contr...

Page 299: ...sign Maintenance and Inspection 6 Select QnUD P V QnUDEH for Controller Type in Ethernet of GT Designer3 For Ethernet of GT Designer3 refer to the following 8 3 3 Ethernet setting 7 For the system configuration of Built in Ethernet port LCPU refer to the following manual MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Built In Ethernet Function 8 Select LCPU for Controller Type in Ethernet of GT Designer3 For E...

Page 300: ...es for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 4 For the system configuration of the CNC C70 refer to the following manual C70 Series SET UP MANUAL 5 Select Q17nNC for Controller Ty...

Page 301: ... switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 4 Use cables with the following specifications 5 For the system configuration on the CC Link IE Field Network module side refer to the following manual CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module User s Manual 6 The number of connectable GOTs for one network is 63 units at most...

Page 302: ...hows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used 10BASE T Max 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 5 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connecti...

Page 303: ... Range GOT NET No Set the network No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 239 GOT PLC No 3 Set the station No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 64 GOT IP Address 2 Set the IP address of the GOT Default 192 168 3 18 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Subnet Mask 2 Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connection via router If the sub network is not used the default value is set Default 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 to 255...

Page 304: ... the IP address of the GOT Default 192 168 0 18 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connection via router If the sub network is not used the default value is set Default 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Default Gateway Set the router address of the default gateway where the GOT is connected Only for connection via router Default 0 0 0 0 0...

Page 305: ...SCPU S1 Q173D S CPU Q172D S CPU C Controller module Q Series QnD H CCPU Connection to Built in Ethernet port LCPU LCPU Ethernet module NZ2GF ETB NZ2GF ETB Q17nNCCPU Q17nNC The RnENCPU varies in choice of Controller Type by a port name Port CPU P1 RCPU Port P1 RJ71EN71 Port P2 Not applicable to the Ethernet connection Ethernet module MELSEC iQ R Series RJ71EN71 Ethernet module Q L Series QJ71E71 LJ...

Page 306: ...re reflected to the parameter from the MELSOFT Navigator those settings are added Items set in advance are not deleted However if the combination of the N W No and the PLC No or the IP address overlaps the item set in advance is overwritten 3 Changing the host on the GOT main unit The host can be changed by the utility function of the GOT main unit For the detailed connection method refer to the f...

Page 307: ...are reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT Navigator changes to green Set items which are displayed in green cells from the MELSOFT Navigator b When the settings of Transfer network No Relay network No or Relay station No are reflected to the parameter from the MELSOFT Navigator those settings are added Items set in advance are not deleted However if the target network No overlaps the item set in ...

Page 308: ...VG Q24DHCCPU LS Q26DHCCPU LS 8 4 8 Built in Ethernet port LCPU L02CPU L26CPU L26CPU BT L02CPU P L06CPU P L26CPU P L26CPU PBT L06CPU 8 4 5 8 4 6 Ethernet module MELSEC iQ R Series RJ71EN71 8 4 3 Ethernet module Q Series QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B2 QJ71E71 8 4 7 Ethernet module L Series LJ71E71 100 Ethernet module QnA Series AJ71QE71N3 T AJ71QE71N B5 AJ71QE71N B2 AJ71QE71N T AJ71QE71N B5T AJ71...

Page 309: ...ng and Ethernet of GT Designer3 refer to the following 8 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 2 Ethernet setting When connecting Built in Ethernet port RCPU to a GOT the setting items for the network No and station No do not exist at the PLC side However these virtual values must be set on the GOT side Therefore set the network No and station No Set the network No that does n...

Page 310: ... connection This section describes the settings of the GOT and Built in Ethernet port CPU in the following case of system configuration POINT POINT POINT Built in Ethernet port CPU For details of Built in Ethernet port CPU refer to the following manual Manuals of MELSEC iQ R Series Manuals of MELSEC iQ F Series System configuration For MELSEC iQ R Series 1 These setting items do not exist at the P...

Page 311: ...does not exist on the network system and any station No 1 Controller setting 2 Ethernet setting 1 Set the same value as that of GOT N W No 2 Set a value different from that of the GOT PLC No and the PLC No of other PLCs on the same network 3 In the case of MELSEC iQ F series it is FX5CPU 4 In the case of MELSEC iQ F series it is 5562 fixed 5 In the case of MELSEC iQ F series it is TCP fixed Item S...

Page 312: ...PLC For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works3 refer to the following manual Manuals of MELSEC iQ R Series 8 4 3 Connecting to Ethernet module MELSEC iQ R Series This section describes the settings of the GOT and Ethernet module MELSEC iQ R Series in the following case of the system configuration POINT POINT POINT Ethernet module MELSEC iQ R Series For details of the Ethernet module MELSEC i...

Page 313: ...ON again or reset the PLC CPU 3 Routing setting Up to 238 Target Station Network No s can be set However the same target station network number cannot be set twice or more multiple times Therefore the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 238 kinds of Target Station Network No s Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection IP Address 192 168 3 19 Subnet Mas...

Page 314: ... GT Designer3 1 Controller setting 2 Ethernet setting POINT POINT POINT Controller Setting and Ethernet of GT Designer3 For Controller Setting and Ethernet of GT Designer3 refer to the following 8 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings RJ71EN71 RUN INIT OPEN SD ERR COM ERR RD 100M Item Set value Use default value GOT NET No 1 GOT PLC No 1 GOT IP Address 192 168 3 18 GOT Port No...

Page 315: ...uals of MELSEC iQ R Series 8 4 4 Connection to C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series This section describes the settings of the GOT and C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series in the following case of system configuration Use CW Configurator for the C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series communication settings POINT POINT POINT C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series For details of C Controller mod...

Page 316: ...ion No Set the network No that does not exist on the network system and any station No 1 Controller setting 2 Ethernet setting 1 Set the same value as that of GOT N W No 2 Set a value different from that of the GOT PLC No and the PLC No of other PLCs on the same network Item 1 Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection CH1 Use IP Address 192 168 3 3 Subnet Mask Default Gateway CH2 Not Use IP Ad...

Page 317: ... 8 4 5 Connecting to Built in Ethernet port CPU one to one connection This section describes the settings of the GOT and Built in Ethernet port CPU in the following case of system configuration POINT POINT POINT Connecting to Built in Ethernet port CPU For details of Built in Ethernet port CPU refer to the following manual QnUCPU User s Manual Communication via Built in Ethernet Port MELSEC L CPU ...

Page 318: ...on C Ping 192 168 3 39 Reply from 192 168 3 39 bytes 32 time 10ms TTL 32 b When abnormal communication C Ping 192 168 3 39 Request timed out 2 When abnormal communication At abnormal communication check the followings and execute the Ping command again Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Operation state of PLC CPU faulty or not The IP address of Built in...

Page 319: ...t in Ethernet port Example Q parameter setting screen Necessary As necessary Not necessary GOT The settings other than the following are set to the default Network No 1 PLC No 1 IP address 192 168 0 18 Port No 5001 Communication format UDP fixed Network No 1 virtual PLC No 2 virtual IP address 192 168 0 1 Port No 5006 fixed Communication format UDP fixed Connecting to Built in Ethernet port CPU Th...

Page 320: ...twork No that is not existed on the network system and any station No 1 Controller setting 2 Ethernet setting 1 Set the same value as that of GOT N W No 2 Set a value different from that of the GOT PLC No and the PLC No of other PLCs on the same network Item Set value Protocol UDP fixed Open system MELSOFT connection fixed Host station port No Use default value Item Set value Use default value GOT...

Page 321: ...agnostics of GX Developer refer to the following manual QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection MELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 8 4 7 Connecting to Ethernet module Q L Series This section describes the settings of the GOT and Ethernet module Q Series in the following case of the system configuration POINT POINT POINT Ethernet modul...

Page 322: ...hen ON or resetting Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Network type Ethernet fixed Starting I O No 1 0000H Network No 2 1 Group No 0 fixed Station No 3 2 Mode Online fixed Operation setting Refer to 2 Initial settings Use default value Open settings Router relay parameter Station No IP information FTP Parameters E mail settings Interrupt settings Redundant settings 4 Routing Parame...

Page 323: ...on when the module is ready to communicate For confirming the communication state refer to the following Confirming the communication state of Ethernet module 1 The LEDs layout of QJ71E71 100 Controller Setting and Ethernet of GT Designer3 1 Controller setting 2 Ethernet setting POINT POINT POINT Controller Setting and Ethernet of GT Designer3 For Controller Setting and Ethernet of GT Designer3 re...

Page 324: ...le Q Series This section describes the settings of the GOT and C Controller module Q Series in the following case of the system configuration POINT POINT POINT C Controller module Q Series For details of C Controller module Q Series refer to the following manual C Controller Module Q Series User s Manual Hardware Design Function Explanation System configuration 1 These setting items do not exist a...

Page 325: ... C Controller module Q Series has been changed input the changed IP address or host name 2 If the account of the C Controller module Q Series has been changed input the changed user name and password b Online operation Necessary As necessary Not necessary c Detail settings Necessary As necessary Not necessary Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Target module 1 192 168 3 3 Default Wr...

Page 326: ...ule Q Series to a GOT the setting items for the network No and station No do not exist at the PLC side However these virtual values must be set on the GOT side Therefore set the network No and station No Set the network No that is not existed on the network system and any station No Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Points occupied by empty slot Use default value Remote reset Outp...

Page 327: ...ries This section describes the settings of the GOT and Ethernet module QnA Series in the following case of the system configuration POINT POINT POINT Ethernet module QnA Series For details of the Ethernet module QnA Series refer to the following manual For QnA Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual System configuration 1 The Ethernet module is mounted on the base unit slot 0 The Start I O No of ...

Page 328: ...BASE T B 432 1 0 F E D C A 9 8 7 65 RUN BUF1 BUF2 BUF3 BUF4 BUF5 BUF6 BUF7 BUF8 RDY BSY SW ERR COM ERR CPU R W TEST TEST ERR AJ71QE71N3 T ON 0 ONLINE 5 TEST4 4 TEST3 3 TEST2 2 TEST1 1 OFFLINE MODE SW8 SW7 SW6 SW5 SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1 1 2 ON SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 10BASE T A1SJ71QE71N3 T 4 TEST3 3 TEST2 2 TEST1 1 OFFLINE 0 ONLINE 5 TEST4 MODE 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F O 1 2 3 4 BSY SW ERR COM ERR C...

Page 329: ...ting parameter setting Up to 64 Transfer Network No s can be set However the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more multiple times Therefore the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of Transfer Network No s POINT POINT POINT Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source G...

Page 330: ...ual values must be set on the GOT side Controller Setting and Ethernet of GT Designer3 Item Set value Use default value GOT NET No 1 GOT PLC No 1 GOT IP Address 192 168 0 18 GOT Port No Communication 5001 GOT Port No Ethernet Download 5014 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Retry 3times Startup Time 3sec Timeout Time 3sec Delay Time 0ms Item Set value Ethernet setting No 1 Host N W ...

Page 331: ...F2 BUF3 BUF4 BUF5 BUF6 BUF7 BUF8 0 10BASE T 4 C 8 J71E71N3 T RUN BUF1 BUF2 BUF3 BUF4 BUF5 BUF6 BUF7 BUF8 RDY BSY SW ERR COM ERR CPU R W TEST TEST ERR A ON 0 ONLINE 4 TEST3 3 TEST2 2 TEST1 1 OFFLINE MODE SW8 SW7 SW6 SW5 SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1 0 1 2 A1SJ71E71N3 T A1SJ71E71N B5 A1SJ71E71N B2 A1SJ71E71N T A1SJ71E71N B5T A1SJ71E71 B5 S3 A1SJ71E71 B2 S3 AJ71E71N3 T AJ71E71N B5 AJ71E71N B2 AJ71E71N T AJ71E71N B...

Page 332: ...f Ethernet module D110 Application setting D111 Port No of Ethernet module D112 to D113 IP address of GOT D114 Port No of GOT D200 Initial fault code Buffer memory address Item Set value Dec Hex 0 to 1 0 to 1H IP address of Ethernet module C0A80013H 192 168 0 19 16 10H Application setting 1 100H 24 18H Port No of Ethernet module 5001 25 to 26 19 to 1AH IP address of GOT FFFFFFFFH 27 1BH Port No of...

Page 333: ... OFF and then ON or resetting IP address of Ethernet module 192 168 0 19 Initial request COM ERR turned off request Clear the initial fault code Set to the permit of communication while stopping the PLC CPU Communication format UDP IP Port No of Ethernet module 5001 IP address of GOT When GOT is used FFFFFFFFH Port No of GOT When GOT is used FFFFH Read the initial fault code Request to open Normal...

Page 334: ...ner3 refer to the following 8 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings RUN BUF1 BUF2 BUF3 BUF4 BUF5 BUF6 BUF7 BUF8 RDY BSY SW ERR COM ERR CPU R W TEST TEST ERR BSY SW ERR COM ERR CPU R W TEST ERR TEST RDY RUN BUF1 BUF2 BUF3 BUF4 BUF5 BUF6 BUF7 BUF8 A1SJ71E71N3 T A1SJ71E71N B5 A1SJ71E71N B2 A1SJ71E71N T A1SJ71E71N B5T A1SJ71E71 B5 S3 A1SJ71E71 B2 S3 AJ71E71N3 T AJ71E71N B5 AJ71E71...

Page 335: ...uration tool 1 Ethernet settings Set the Ethernet parameter with FX3U ENET L Configuration tool For using FX3U ENET L Configuration tool install GX Developer Ver 8 88S or later on the personal computer For details on FX3U ENET L Configuration tool refer to the following manual FX3U ENET L Configuration tool Operation manual Required Set if necessary Not required 1 Set the number of the Ethernet mo...

Page 336: ...ble controller CPU turn off and then on or reset the programmable controller CPU 3 Open settings Required Set if necessary Not required POINT POINT POINT When connecting to multiple GOTs and peripheral devices The number of protocols equivalent to that of the GOTs and devices must be set Item Setting Setting with GOT connected Communication date code 1 Use default value IP address 192 168 0 19 Ini...

Page 337: ...el according to the installation position of FX3U ENET ADP on the CPU body 2 The default value of IP address is 192 168 1 250 Set the IP address corresponding to the system configuration POINT POINT POINT When changing Ethernet parameter After writing Ethernet parameters to the PLC CPU turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again 2 Open settings POINT POINT POINT When connecting to multiple GOTs and pe...

Page 338: ... When abnormal communication At abnormal communication check the followings and execute the Ping command again Mounting condition of Ethernet communication unit Cable connecting condition Confirmation of switch and network parameter setting Operation state of PLC CPU faulty or not IP address of GOT specified by Ping command POINT POINT POINT Ethernet diagnostics of FX3U ENET L Configuration tool E...

Page 339: ...X Works2 Ver 1 91V or later is required For details on the setting of FX3GE refer to the following manual FX3GE SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS HARDWARE MANUAL Required Set if necessary Not required 1 The default value of IP address is 192 168 1 250 Set the IP address corresponding to the system configuration POINT POINT POINT When changing Ethernet parameter After writing Ethernet parameters to t...

Page 340: ...OINT POINT Controller Setting and Ethernet of GT Designer3 For Controller Setting and Ethernet of GT Designer3 refer to the following 8 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Item Setting Setting with GOT connected Protocol TCP Open System MELSOFT connection Item Setting Use default value GOT NET No 1 GOT PLC No 1 GOT IP Address 192 168 0 18 GOT Port No Communication 5019 GOT P...

Page 341: ...state of PLC CPU faulty or not IP address of GOT specified by Ping command 8 4 13 Connecting to Display I F CNC C70 This section describes the settings of the GOT and Display I F CNC C70 in the following case of the system configuration POINT POINT POINT Display I F CNC C70 For details of the Display I F CNC C70 refer to the following manual C70 Series SET UP MANUAL System configuration IP address...

Page 342: ... 168 0 19 bytes 32 time 1ms TTL 64 b When abnormal communication C Ping 192 168 0 19 Request timed out 2 When abnormal communication At abnormal communication check the followings and execute the Ping command again Mounting condition of CNC C70 Cable connecting condition Switch settings and network parameter settings Operation state of PLC CPU faulty or not IP address of the CNC C70 specified for ...

Page 343: ...meter setting Set the followings as necessary Up to 64 Transfer Network No s can be set However the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more multiple times Therefore the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of Transfer Network No s GOT Use default value for settings other than the following Network No 3 PC No 1 IP address 192 168 3 18 Po...

Page 344: ... Ethernet adapter module IP address 2 Set according to the fourth octet PC No of the Ethernet adapter module IP address 3 Set according to the Ethernet adapter module IP address 3 Routing parameter setting 1 Set the same value as the Ethernet adapter module network No 2 Set according to the third octet network No of the Ethernet adapter module IP address 3 Set according to the fourth octet PC No o...

Page 345: ...ls of Built in Ethernet port CPU refer to the following manual User s Manual of Q173D S CPU Q172D S CPU and Q170MCPU System configuration Leave the Built in Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU settings as default in the following system configuration 1 For the settings when using system devices including a hub and a transceiver refer to the following 8 4 6 Connecting to Built in Ethernet port CPU ...

Page 346: ...rt CPU 1 When using the Command Prompt of Windows Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows a When normal communication C Ping 192 168 3 39 Reply from 192 168 3 2 bytes 32 time 10ms TTL 32 b When abnormal communication C Ping 192 168 3 39 Request timed out 2 When abnormal communication At abnormal communication check the followings and execute the Ping command again Cable connecting ...

Page 347: ...6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION POINT POINT POINT Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2 GX Developer Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2 GX Developer is available to a Ping test from the PLC For details of Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2 GX Developer refer to the following manual GX Works2 Version1 Operating Manual Common GX Developer Version8 Operating Manu...

Page 348: ...tarts before the SD card becomes available a system alarm occurs Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual When connecting to multiple GOTs 1 Setting PLC No When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network set each PLC No to the GOT 8 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 2 Setting IP addres...

Page 349: ... Ethernet module to the PLC and set the routing setting to monitor as other network When the Multi channel is supported for GT16 set each channel with the networks No to monitor Remote password for QCPU Do not set a remote password for QCPU Monitoring with GOT becomes unavailable When connecting to Built in Ethernet port of Built in Ethernet port CPU Connect to GOT after turning on the network equ...

Page 350: ...8 64 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 5 Precautions ...

Page 351: ...ink IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC Link CONNECTION INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION 14 CC Link CONNECTION Via G4 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 9 1 9 MELSECNET H CONNECTION PLC TO PLC NETWORK 9 1 Connectable Model List 9 2 9 2 System Configuration 9 8 9 3 GOT Side Settings 9 10 9 4 PLC Side Settings 9 12 9 5 Precautions 9 17 ...

Page 352: ...PLC network coaxial bus system 2 MELSECNET H network module When connecting the MELSECNET H network module to the MELSECNET H network system specify the MELSECNET H Mode or the MELSECNET H Extended Mode as a network type 9 1 1 PLC Motion controller CPU The following table shows the connectable models Continued to next page Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC iQ R Series R04C...

Page 353: ...ntinued to next page 1 Use CPU function version B or a later version Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series R12CCPU V MELSECNE T H MELSECiQ F Series FX5U FX5UC MELSECNE T H MELSEC Q Q mode Q00JCPU MELSECNE T H 1 1 9 2 Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Main base Q25PRHCPU Main base Q...

Page 354: ... C Controller module Q Series Q12DCCPU V 1 Q24DHCCPU V VG Q24DHCCPU LS MELSECNET H 9 2 Q26DHCCPU LS MELSEC QS QS001CPU MELSECNET H 9 2 MELSEC L L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU BT L02CPU P L06CPU P L26CPU P L26CPU PBT L02SCPU L02SCPU P MELSEC Q A mode Q02CPU A Q02HCPU A Q06HCPU A MELSEC QnA QnACPU Q2ACPU Q2ACPU S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU MELSEC QnA QnASCPU Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 MELSEC A...

Page 355: ...B or later 2 Use main modules with the following product numbers Q172CPU Product number N or later Q173CPU Product number M or later 3 Only the first step can be used on the extension base unit Q52B Q55B 4 The extension base unit Q5 B Q6 B can be used Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC A AnSCPU A2USCPU A2USCPU S1 A2USHCPU S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24 R2 A1SHCPU A2SCPU A2SCPU S1 A2SH...

Page 356: ...SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU S1 MELSEC WS WS0 CPU0 WS0 CPU1 WS0 CPU3 MELSECNET H Remote I O station QJ72LP25 25 QJ72LP25G QJ72BR15 CC Link IE Field Network head module LJ72GF15 T2 CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF ETB CNC C70 Q173NCCPU MELSECNET H 9 2 Robot controller CRnQ 700 Q172DRCPU MELSECNET H 9 2 MELSEC FX FX0 FX0S FX0N FX1 FX2 FX2C FX1S FX1N...

Page 357: ...N INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION 14 CC Link CONNECTION Via G4 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 9 1 2 MELSECNET H network module 1 Use function version B or later of the MELSECNET H network module and CPU CPU series Model name Optical loop Coaxial bus MELSEC Q Q mode 1 MELSEC QS Motion controller CPU Q Series CNC C70 Robot controller CRnQ 700 QJ71LP21 QJ71LP21 25 QJ71LP21S 25 QJ71BR...

Page 358: ...ation of the MELSECNET H network module refer to the following manual Q corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network Use a MELSECNET H network module of function version B or a later version MELSECNET H network module GOT Connection cable QCPU MELSECNET H Communication driver PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment Model name MELSECNET H network mod...

Page 359: ...6 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 3 For the coaxial cable refer to the following manual Q corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network For the coaxial cable connector connection method refer to the following 1 4 2 Coaxial cable connector connection method 4 The overall extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and ...

Page 360: ...med in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 1 1 2 I F communication setting 9 3 2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment 2 3 4 Click Item Description Range Network Type Set the network type Default MNET H mode MNET H mode MNET 10 mode MNET H Extended mode 1 Network No Set the network No Default 1 1 to 239 Station No Set the statio...

Page 361: ...necessary For details of routing parameters refer to the following manual Q corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network POINT POINT POINT 1 Routing parameter setting of relay station Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the relay station For the setting refer to the following 9 4 PLC Side Settings 2 Parameter reflection function of MELSOFT Navigator a Th...

Page 362: ...h setting of MELSECNET H network module Set the station number setting switch and mode setting switch MELSECNET H network module 1 Use the default value for settings other than the following Station No 1 Mode Online 10Mbps Network type MNET H mode Control station Network No 1 Total stations 2 Network range assignment 2 MELSECNET H PLC to PLC network GOT Use the default value for settings other tha...

Page 363: ...per a Network parameter Necessary As necessary Not necessary 1 When using Q170MCPU set it according to the system configuration 2 Specify the same network No as that of the GOT 3 Set the same mode setting as that of the GOT 4 Set it when the MELSECNET H network module is used in the redundant QnPRHCPU system Station number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection St...

Page 364: ...er station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of Transfer Network No s POINT POINT POINT Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT For the setting refer to the following 9 3 3 Routing parameter setting Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Monitoring time 200 LB LW setting 1 Send range for station LB St...

Page 365: ... POINT POINT When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the C Controller module Q Series either turn the C Controller module Q Series OFF and then ON or reset it Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Target module 1 192 168 3 3 Default Write authority Mark the checkbox User name 2 target Password 2 password Detailed settings Item Set value Setting neces...

Page 366: ...r the setting refer to the following 9 3 3 Routing parameter setting 9 4 4 Controller Setting of GT Designer3 POINT POINT POINT Controller Setting of GT Designer3 For Controller Setting of GT Designer3 refer to the following 9 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Item Range Transfer target network No 1 to 239 Relay network No 1 to 239 Relay station No 1 to 120 Item Set value ...

Page 367: ... H connection when a network error occurs in the system alarm the system alarm message cannot be canceled even though the causes are removed To cancel the system alarm display restart the GOT MELSECNET H network module version For version restrictions of the MELSECNET H network module refer to the following manual Q corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network Conne...

Page 368: ...9 18 9 MELSECNET H CONNECTION PLC TO PLC NETWORK 9 5 Precautions ...

Page 369: ... FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC Link CONNECTION INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION 14 CC Link CONNECTION Via G4 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 10 1 10 MELSECNET 10 CONNECTION PLC TO PLC NETWORK 10 1 Connectable Model List 10 2 10 2 System Configuration 10 8 10 3 GOT Side Settings 10 10 10 4 PLC Side Setting 10 13 10 5 Precautions 10 26 ...

Page 370: ...ork optical loop system MELSECNET 10 network system PLC to PLC network coaxial bus system 2 MELSECNET H network module When connecting the MELSECNET H network module to the MELSECNET 10 network system specify the MELSECNET 10 Mode as a network type 10 1 1 PLC Motion controller CPU The following table shows the connectable models Continued to next page Series Model name Clock Communication type Ref...

Page 371: ...CTION 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION Continued to next page 1 Use CPU function version B or a later version Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series R12CCPU V MELSECNET 10 MELSEC iQ F Series FX5U FX5UC MELSECNET 10 MELSEC Q Q mode Q00JCPU MELSECNET 10 1 1 10 2 Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q...

Page 372: ...13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU Q03UDVCPU Q04UDVCPU Q06UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU Q26UDVCPU C Controller module Q Series Q12DCCPU V 1 Q24DHCCPU V VG Q24DHCCPU LS MELSECNET 10 10 2 Q26DHCCPU LS MELSEC QS QS001CPU MELSECNET 10 10 2 MELSEC L L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU BT L02CPU P L06CPU P L26CPU P L26CPU PBT L02SCPU L02SCPU P MELSEC Q A mode Q02CPU A Q02HCPU A Q06HCPU A MELSECNET 10 10 ...

Page 373: ...CONNECTION 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION Continued to next page Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC A AnCPU A2UCPU MELSECNET 10 10 2 A2UCPU S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU S1 A2ACPUP21 S1 A2ACPUR21 S1 A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21 A1NCPU A1NCPUP21 A1NCPUR21 A2NCPU A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUR21 A2NCPU S1 A2NCPUP21 S1 A2NCPUR21 S1 A3NCPU A3NCPUP21 A3NCPUR21 MELSEC A AnSC...

Page 374: ...it Q52B Q55B 4 The extension base unit Q5 B Q6 B can be used Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC A A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU DC24 A2CCPU A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24 PRF A2CJCPU S3 A1FXCPU Motion controller CPU Q Series Q172CPU 1 2 MELSECNET 10 10 2 Q173CPU 1 2 Q172CPUN 1 Q173CPUN 1 Q172HCPU Q173HCPU Q172DCPU Q173DCPU Q172DCPU S1 Q173DCPU S1 Q172DS...

Page 375: ...ECNET H remote I O station QJ72LP25 25 QJ72LP25G QJ72BR15 CC Link IE Field Network head module LJ72GF15 T2 CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF ETB CNC C70 Q173NCCPU MELSECNET 10 10 2 Robot controller CRnQ 700 Q172DRCPU CR750 Q Q172DRCPU CR751 Q Q172DRCPU MELSECNET 10 10 2 MELSEC FX FX0 FX0S FX0N FX1 FX2 FX2C FX1S FX1N FX2N FX1NC FX2NC FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3GE FX3U FX3UC CPU series ...

Page 376: ...erence Manual Type MELSECNET 10 Network system PLC to PLC network Reference Manual 4 Specify the MELSECNET 10 Mode as the Communication Settings For the setting refer to the following 10 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 5 Not available for the GT155 MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 network module PLC GOT Connection cable MELSECNET H Communication driver When MELSECNET H communica...

Page 377: ... the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and the total number of stations For details refer to the following manual Q corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network For QnA Q4AR MELSECNET 10 Network System Reference Manual Type MELSECNET 10 Network system PLC to PLC network Reference Manual 5 Specify the MELSECNET 10 Mode as the Communi...

Page 378: ... The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 1 1 2 I F communication setting 10 3 2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment 1 MELSECNET H 2 3 4 Click Item Description Range Network Type Set the network type Default MNET H mode MNET H mode MNET 10 mode MNET H Extended mode 1 Network ...

Page 379: ...4 kinds of Transfer Network No s POINT POINT POINT 1 Routing parameter setting When communicating within the host network routing parameter setting is unnecessary 2 Selection of communication unit Routing parameters cannot be set in the GT15 75J71LP23 Z and the GT15 75J71BR13 Z When setting routing parameters use the GT15 J71LP23 25 or the GT15 J71BR13 according to the connection type to be used F...

Page 380: ... 10 communication unit User s Manual Network number setting switch Description Set value Set the network No of the MELSECNET 10 communication unit Default 001 1 to 239 Group number setting switch Description Set value Set the group No of the MELSECNET 10 communication unit Default 0 0 No group setting fixed 1 8 0 7 F 6 E 5 D 4 C 3 B 2 A 1 9 MODE 5 0 6 1 7 2 8 3 9 4 5 0 6 1 7 2 8 3 9 4 STATION No X...

Page 381: ...witch Model name Reference MELSECNET H network module QJ71LP21 QJ71LP21 25 QJ71LP21S 25 QJ71BR11 10 4 1 MELSECNET 10 network module QnA Series AJ71QLP21 AJ71QLP21S AJ71QBR11 A1SJ71QLP21 A1SJ71QLP21S A1SJ71QBR11 10 4 2 MELSECNET 10 network module A Series AJ71LP21 AJ71BR11 A1SJ71LP21 A1SJ71BR1 10 4 3 MELSECNET H network module 1 Use the default value for settings other than the following Station No...

Page 382: ...uration 2 Specify the same network No as that of the GOT 3 Set it when the MELSECNET H network module is used in the redundant QnPRHCPU system Station number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station number setting Station No 1 1 1 Mode setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Mode setting Online 10Mbps 0 fixed Item Set value S...

Page 383: ...Network No s can be set However the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more multiple times Therefore the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of Transfer Network No s POINT POINT POINT Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT For the setting refer to the following...

Page 384: ...ies OFF and then ON or reset it Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Target module 1 192 168 3 3 Default Write authority Mark the checkbox User name 2 target Password 2 password Detailed settings Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Number of modules 1 Link device refresh cycle Use default value Routing parameter Refer to b Target module 1 Start I O No 0000H Channel No ...

Page 385: ...necessary for the request source GOT For the setting refer to the following 10 3 3 Routing parameter setting Controller Setting of GT Designer3 POINT POINT POINT Controller Setting of GT Designer3 For the setting method of Controller Setting of GT Designer3 refer to the following 10 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Setting of the MELSECNET 10 communication unit POINT POIN...

Page 386: ... PC REMOTE SW E M S E PRM E CRC OVER AB IF TIME DATA UNDER SD RD POWER MNG S MNG D LINK T PASS CPUR W 10 1 100 E R R O R 1 2 6 3 5 AJ71QBR11 A1SJ71QLP21 A1SJ71QLP21 3 2 0 5 9 4 8 7 6 1 3 2 0 5 9 4 8 7 6 1 3 2 0 5 9 4 8 7 6 1 3 2 0 5 9 4 8 7 6 1 3 2 0 5 9 4 8 7 6 1 3 2 0 5 9 4 8 7 6 1 SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF PC N ST PRM ON REM MNG D PRM ST SIZE 8 16 32 64 LB LW SIZE 2 4 6 8k CRC OVER AB IF TIME DATA...

Page 387: ...dication select switch is changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again or reset the PLC CPU Network number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Network No setting Network No 1 1 1 Group number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Group No setting No group setting 0 fixed Station number setting switch Description Set value Settin...

Page 388: ... or resetting Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Network type MNET 10 Control station fixed Start I O No 0000H Network No 1 1 Total stations 2 Network range assignment Refer to 2 Refresh parameters Use default value Interlink transmission parameters Routing parameters Refer to 3 Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Monitoring time 200 BW setting 1 Send range for each ...

Page 389: ...also necessary for the request source GOT For the setting refer to the following 10 3 3 Routing parameter setting Controller Setting of GT Designer3 POINT POINT POINT Controller Setting of GT Designer3 For the setting method of Controller Setting of GT Designer3 refer to the following 10 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Setting of the MELSECNET 10 communication unit POINT...

Page 390: ...8 7 6 1 3 2 0 5 9 4 8 7 6 1 3 2 0 5 9 4 8 7 6 1 3 2 0 5 9 4 8 7 6 1 3 2 0 5 9 4 8 7 6 1 E 6 D 5 C 4 B 3 A 2 9 1 8 0 F 7 SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF PC N ST PRM ON REM MNG D PRM ST SIZE 8 16 32 64 LB LW SIZE 2 4 6 8k CRC OVER AB IF TIME DATA UNDER SD RD PW PC REM SWE M S E PRM E R E CPU R W RUN MNG S MNG DUAL D LINK T PAS F E E R R O R L R DISPLAY F L R L NETWORK NO X100 X10 X1 OFF ON IN FRONT SIDE OUT ...

Page 391: ...setting other than the LED indication select switch is changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again or reset the PLC CPU Network number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Network No setting Network No 1 1 2 1 Group number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Group No setting No group setting 0 fixed Station number setting swit...

Page 392: ... resetting Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Network type MNET 10 Control station fixed Start I O No 0000H Network No 1 1 Total stations 2 Network range assignment Refer to 2 Refresh parameters Use default value Interlink transmission parameters Routing parameters Refer to 3 Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Monitoring time 200 LB LW setting 1 Send range for each ...

Page 393: ...also necessary for the request source GOT For the setting refer to the following 10 3 3 Routing parameter setting Controller Setting of GT Designer3 POINT POINT POINT Controller Setting of GT Designer3 For the setting method of Controller Setting of GT Designer3 refer to the following 10 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Setting of the MELSECNET 10 communication unit POINT...

Page 394: ...em the following time is taken until when the PLC runs QCPU Q mode motion controller CPU Q series 10 seconds or more MELDAS C70 18 seconds or more When the GOT starts before the PLC runs a system alarm occurs Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual Connection to QCPU Q mode Use function version B or later of the MELSE...

Page 395: ...IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC Link CONNECTION INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION 14 CC Link CONNECTION Via G4 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 11 1 11 CC Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11 1 Connectable Model List 11 2 11 2 System Configuration 11 8 11 3 GOT side settings 11 9 11 4 PLC Side Setting 11 11 11 5 Precautions 11 25 ...

Page 396: ...e safety function module R6SFM must have the same pair version If their pair versions differ the RnSFCPU does not operate Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC iQ R Series R04CPU CC Link IE 11 2 R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU R04ENCPU R08ENCPU R16ENCPU R32ENCPU R120ENCPU R08SFCPU 1 R16SFCPU 1 R32SFCPU 1 R120SFCPU 1 Motion controller CPU MELSEC iQ...

Page 397: ...ontinued to next page 1 When in multiple CPU system configuration use CPU function version B or later Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC Q Q mode Q00JCPU CC Link IE 1 1 11 2 Q00CPU 1 Q01CPU 1 Q02CPU 1 Q02HCPU 1 Q06HCPU 1 Q12HCPU 1 Q25HCPU 1 Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Main base Q25PRHCPU Main base Q12PRHCPU Extension base Q25PRHCPU Extension base Q00UJCPU ...

Page 398: ...es Q12DCCPU V 1 Q24DHCCPU V VG Q24DHCCPU LS CC Link IE 11 2 Q26DHCCPU LS MELSEC QS QS001CPU CC Link IE 11 2 MELSEC L L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU BT L02CPU P L06CPU P L26CPU P L26CPU PBT L02SCPU L02SCPU P MELSEC Q A mode Q02CPU A Q02HCPU A Q06HCPU A MELSEC QnA QnACPU Q2ACPU Q2ACPU S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU MELSEC QnA QnASCPU Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 MELSEC A AnCPU A2UCPU A2UCPU S1 A3U...

Page 399: ...ep can be used on the extension base unit Q52B Q55B 2 The extension base unit Q5 B Q6 B can be used Series Model name Clock Communicati on type Refer to MELSEC A AnSCPU A2USCPU A2USCPU S1 A2USHCPU S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24 R2 A1SHCPU A2SCPU A2SCPU S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU S3 A1SJHCPU MELSEC A A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU DC24 A2CCPU A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24 PRF A...

Page 400: ...A172SHCPU A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU S1 MELSEC WS WS0 CPU0 WS0 CPU1 WS0 CPU3 MELSECNET H Remote I O station QJ72LP25 25 QJ72LP25G QJ72BR15 CC Link IE Field Network head module LJ72GF15 T2 CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF ETB CNC C70 Q173NCCPU CC Link IE 11 2 Robot controller CRnQ 700 Q172DRCPU CR750 Q Q172DRCPU CR751 Q Q172DRCPU CC Link IE 11 2 MELSEC FX FX0 FX0S FX0N FX1...

Page 401: ...CTION 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 11 1 2 CC Link IE Controller Network communication unit 1 When the CC Link IE Controller Network is in the extended mode use a unit with the upper five digits of the serial No 12052 or later CPU series CC Link IE Controller Network communication unit MELSEC iQ R Series Motion controller CPU MELSEC iQ R Series C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series RJ71GP21 SX ME...

Page 402: ...e connected When a QCPU other than Universal model QCPU is the control station the number of connectable GOTs is 63 units at most Basic model QCPU and the QSCPU cannot be used as the control station 5 When the CC Link IE Controller Network is in the extended mode only MELSEC Q series Universal model QCPU can be used 6 When the CC Link IE Controller Network is in the extended mode use a module with...

Page 403: ...ent can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 1 1 2 I F communication setting 11 3 2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment 2 3 4 Click Item Description Range Network Type 4 Set the network Type Default CC IE Control CC IE Control CC IE Control extended mode Network No Set the network No Default 1 1 to 239 Station N...

Page 404: ...eter setting Up to 64 Transfer Network No s can be set However the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more multiple times Therefore the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of Transfer Network No s POINT POINT POINT Routing parameter setting When communicating within the host network routing parameter setting is unnecessary For details ...

Page 405: ...parameter of GX Works3 a Unit parameter Necessary As necessary Not necessary 1 Specify the same network No as that of the GOT CC Link IE Controller Network module 1 Use the default value for settings other than the following Station No 1 Mode Online Network type CC IE Control Control station Network No 1 Total stations 2 Network range assignment CC Link IE Controller Network GOT Use the default va...

Page 406: ...o other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of Target Network No s POINT POINT POINT Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT For the setting refer to the following 11 3 3 Routing parameter setting Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection LB LW Setting 1 1 LB Station No 1 Start 0000H End 00FFH Stat...

Page 407: ... b Network range assignment Necessary As necessary Not necessary 1 Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission Item Set value Network Type CC IE Control Network No 1 Network No 1 Station No 2 Station No 2 Group No 0 fixed Mode Setting Online auto reconnection Transmission Speed 1Gbps fixed Refresh Interval 1ms Use default value Retry 3times Use default value Timeout Time 3sec Use default ...

Page 408: ...ller Setting of GT Designer3 POINT POINT POINT Network type of the GOT side When the network is in the extended mode be sure to set the network type of the GOT side to CC IE Control extended mode For Controller Setting of GT Designer3 refer to the following 11 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Item Range Target Network No 1 to 239 Relay Network No 1 to 239 Relay Station No...

Page 409: ...ot necessary 1 Specify the same network No as that of the GOT CC Link IE Controller Network module 1 Use the default value for settings other than the following Station No 1 Mode Online Network type CC IE Control Control station Network No 1 Total stations 2 Network range assignment CC Link IE Controller Network GOT Use the default value for settings other than the following LB0000H to LB00FFH LW0...

Page 410: ...o other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of Target Network No s POINT POINT POINT Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT For the setting refer to the following 11 3 3 Routing parameter setting Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection LB LW Setting 1 1 LB Station No 1 Start 0000H End 00FFH Stat...

Page 411: ...ignment Necessary As necessary Not necessary 1 Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission Item Set value Network Type CC IE Control Network No 1 Network No 1 Station No 2 Station No 2 Group No 0 fixed Mode Setting Online auto reconnection Transmission Speed 1Gbps fixed Refresh Interval 1ms Use default value Retry 3times Use default value Timeout Time 3sec Use default value Delay Time 0ms...

Page 412: ...ller Setting of GT Designer3 POINT POINT POINT Network type of the GOT side When the network is in the extended mode be sure to set the network type of the GOT side to CC IE Control extended mode For Controller Setting of GT Designer3 refer to the following 11 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Item Range Target Network No 1 to 239 Relay Network No 1 to 239 Relay Station No...

Page 413: ...roller Network module 1 Use the default value for settings other than the following Station No 1 Mode Online Network type CC IE Control Control station Network No 1 Total stations 2 Network range assignment CC Link IE Controller Network GOT Use the default value for settings other than the following LB0000H to LB00FFH LW00000H to LW000FFH Network type CC IE Control Network No 1 Station No 2 Made S...

Page 414: ...ion from the request source host GOT is 238 kinds of Target Station Network No s POINT POINT POINT Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT For the setting refer to the following 11 3 3 Routing parameter setting Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Monitoring time 2000 LB LW setting 1 1 LB Station No 1 Start 00...

Page 415: ... the changed IP address or host name 2 If the account of the C Controller module Q Series has been changed input the changed user name and password 2 CC IE Control Utility s Parameter Settings a Parameter settings Necessary As necessary Not necessary 1 Set the same mode setting as that of the GOT 2 Specify the same network No as that of the GOT Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Ta...

Page 416: ...tion from the request source host GOT is 238 kinds of Transfer Network No s POINT POINT POINT Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT For the setting refer to the following 11 3 3 Routing parameter setting Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Total stations 2 LB LW settings 1 LB Station No 1 Start 0000H End 00...

Page 417: ...ner3 Item Set value Network Type CC IE Control Network No 1 Network No 1 Station No 2 Station No 2 Mode Setting Online auto reconnection Retry 3times Use default value Timeout Time 3sec Use default value Delay Time 0ms Use default value Refresh Interval 1ms Use default value Monitor Speed High Use default value Item Set value Settingnecessity at GOT connection Network Type CC IE Control Ext Mode C...

Page 418: ...of the GOT side to CC IE Control extended mode For Controller Setting of GT Designer3 refer to the following 11 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 2 Network type of the PLC side Only GX Works2 can set CC IE Control extended mode control station or CC IE Control extended mode ordinary station The CPU which is compatible with the extended mode is Universal model QCPU only ...

Page 419: ... or more When the GOT starts before the PLC runs a system alarm occurs Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual CC Link IE Controller Network module version For version restrictions of the CC Link IE Controller Network module refer to the following manual CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual Connection to QSC...

Page 420: ...11 26 11 CC Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11 5 Precautions ...

Page 421: ...k IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC Link CONNECTION INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION 14 CC Link CONNECTION Via G4 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 12 1 12 CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12 1 Connectable Model List 12 2 12 2 System Configuration 12 8 12 3 GOT side settings 12 9 12 4 PLC Side Setting 12 11 12 5 Precautions 12 19 ...

Page 422: ...st have the same pair version If their pair versions differ the RnSFCPU does not operate Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC iQ R Series R04CPU CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK 12 2 R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU R04ENCPU R08ENCPU R16ENCPU R32ENCPU R120ENCPU R08SFCPU 1 R16SFCPU 1 R32SFCPU 1 R120SFCPU 1 Motion controller CPU MELSEC iQ R Series R16MTCPU ...

Page 423: ...NNECTION 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION Continued to next page Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC Q Q mode Q00JCPU Q00CPU 1 Q01CPU 1 Q02CPU 1 Q02HCPU 1 Q06HCPU 1 Q12HCPU 1 Q25HCPU 1 Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Main base Q25PRHCPU Main base Q12PRHCPU Extension base Q25PRHCPU Extension base Q00UJCPU CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK 12 2 Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Q03UDC...

Page 424: ...NETWORK 12 2 C Controller module Q Series Q12DCCPU V 1 Q24DHCCPU V VG Q24DHCCPU LS 12 2 Q26DHCCPU LS MELSEC QS QS001CPU 3 12 2 MELSEC L L02CPU 2 L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU BT 2 L02CPU P 2 L06CPU P L26CPU P L26CPU PBT 2 L02SCPU L02SCPU P CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK 12 2 MELSEC Q A mode Q02CPU A Q02HCPU A Q06HCPU A MELSEC QnA QnACPU Q2ACPU Q2ACPU S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU MELSEC QnA QnASCPU Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1...

Page 425: ...CPU area use a module with the upper five digits later than 12012 Only the PLC CPU area can be monitored 3 The extension base unit Q5 B Q6 B can be used Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC A AnSCPU A2USCPU A2USCPU S1 A2USHCPU S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24 R2 A1SHCPU A2SCPU A2SCPU S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU S3 A1SJHCPU MELSEC A A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU DC24 ...

Page 426: ...LSEC WS WS0 CPU0 WS0 CPU1 WS0 CPU3 MELSECNET H Remote I O station QJ72LP25 25 QJ72LP25G QJ72BR15 CC Link IE Field Network head module LJ72GF15 T2 CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK 12 2 CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF ETB CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK 12 2 CNC C70 Q173NCCPU CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK 12 2 Robot controller CRnQ 700 Q172DRCPU CR750 Q Q172DRCPU CR751 Q Q172DRCPU CC Link IE FIEL...

Page 427: ...LIGENT DEVICE STATION 14 CC Link CONNECTION Via G4 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 12 1 2 CC Link IE Field Network communication unit CPU series CC Link IE Field Network communication unit MELSEC iQ R Series Motion controller CPU MELSEC iQ R Series C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series RJ71GF11 T2 RJ71EN71 RD77GF4 RD77GF8 RD77GF16 MELSEC Q Universal model C Controller module ...

Page 428: ...GF Simple Motion Module User s Manual 4 When connecting to the RD77GF4 RD77GF8 and RD77GF16 refer to the following manual RD77GF Simple Motion Module User s Manual PLC CPU CC Link IE Field Network unit GOT Connection cable CC Link IE Field Network Communication driver PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment Model name CC Link IE Field Network communication unit Communication type ...

Page 429: ... Setting For details refer to the following 1 1 2 I F communication setting 12 3 2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment Continued to next page 2 3 4 Click Item Description Range Network Type 4 Set the network Type CC IE Field Network No Set the network No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 239 Station No Set the station No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 120 Mode Set...

Page 430: ...ng Up to 64 Transfer Network No s can be set However the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more multiple times Therefore the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of Transfer Network No s POINT POINT POINT Routing parameter setting When communicating within the host network routing parameter setting is unnecessary For details of routing...

Page 431: ...e Start I O No of the CC Link IE Field Network module is set at 0 Unit parameter settings of System configuration Network Type CC IE Field 1 Unit parameter of GX Works3 a Unit parameter Necessary As necessary Not necessary 1 Specify the same network No as that of the GOT CC Link IE Field Network module 1 Use the default value for settings other than the following Station No 0 fixed Mode Online nor...

Page 432: ...network number cannot be set twice or more multiple times Therefore the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 238 kinds of Target Station Network No s POINT POINT POINT Routing parameter setting of request source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT For the setting refer to the following 11 3 3 Routing parameter setting Item Set ...

Page 433: ...System configuration Network Type CC IE Field 1 The CC Link IE Field Network module is mounted on slot 0 of the base unit The Start I O No of the CC Link IE Field Network module is set at 0 Item Set value Network Type CC IE Field Network No 1 Network No 1 Station No 1 Station No 1 Group No 0 fixed Mode Setting Online Refresh Interval 25ms Use default value Input for Error Station Clear Use default...

Page 434: ...changing the unit parameter After writing unit parameters to the PLC CPU turn the PLC CPU OFF then back ON again or reset the PLC CPU 2 GOT station type Set the GOT as an intelligent device station Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station type Master station fixed Network No 1 1 Station No 0 fixed Parameter setting Parameter Channel No Use default value Network Configuration Sett...

Page 435: ...quest source Routing parameter setting is also necessary for the request source GOT For the setting refer to the following 11 3 3 Routing parameter setting GT Designer3 Communication settings of System configuration Network Type CC IE Field POINT POINT POINT Controller Setting of GT Designer3 For the setting method of Controller Setting of GT Designer3 refer to the following 11 3 1 Setting communi...

Page 436: ...g as that of the GOT CC Link IE Field Network module 1 Use the default value for settings other than the following Station No 0 fixed Mode Online normal Network type CC IE Field Master station Network No 1 Total stations 1 Network Configuration Settings CC Link IE Field Network GOT Use the default value for settings other than the following RX RY00H to FFH RWW RWr00H to FFH Network type CC IE Fiel...

Page 437: ...g 2 GOT station type Set the GOT as an intelligent device station c Routing parameter setting Up to 64 Transfer Network No s can be set However the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more multiple times Therefore the one that can access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of Transfer Network No s POINT POINT POINT Routing parameter setting of request sour...

Page 438: ...g method of Controller Setting of GT Designer3 refer to the following 12 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Item Set value Network Type CC IE Field Network No 1 Network No 1 Station No 1 Station No 1 Mode Setting Online Retry 3times Use default value Timeout Time 3sec Use default value Delay Time 0ms Use default value Refresh Interval 25ms Use default value Monitor Speed Hi...

Page 439: ... failure may occur in other stations However after the failure occurrence the GOT reconnects automatically and monitors the devices properly To avoid such data link failure start up the GOT 10 seconds earlier than the master station However if the master station does not complete startup when GOT starts monitoring 10 seconds after the GOT startup the communication timeout occurs in the GOT side Fo...

Page 440: ...12 20 12 CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12 5 Precautions ...

Page 441: ...FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC Link CONNECTION INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION 14 CC Link CONNECTION Via G4 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 13 1 13 CC Link CONNECTION INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION 13 1 Connectable Model List 13 2 13 2 System Configuration 13 7 13 3 GOT Side Settings 13 11 13 4 PLC Side Setting 13 14 13 5 Precautions 13 48 ...

Page 442: ...nd the safety function module R6SFM must have the same pair version If their pair versions differ the RnSFCPU does not operate Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC iQ R Series R04CPU CC Link ID 13 2 R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU R04ENCPU R08ENCPU R16ENCPU R32ENCPU R120ENCPU R08SFCPU 1 R16SFCPU 1 R32SFCPU 1 R120SFCPU 1 Motion controller CPU MELS...

Page 443: ...gits later than 12042 3 Use GT15 J61BT13 as the CC Link communication unit Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC Q Q mode Q00JCPU CC Link ID 13 2 Q00CPU 1 Q01CPU 1 Q02CPU 1 Q02HCPU 1 Q06HCPU 1 Q12HCPU 1 Q25HCPU 1 Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Main base Q25PRHCPU Main base Q12PRHCPU Extension base Q25PRHCPU Extension base Q00UJCPU CC Link ID 3 13 2 Q00UCPU Q01UC...

Page 444: ...ACPU Q2ACPU CC Link ID 13 2 1 Q2ACPU S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU MELSEC QnA QnASCPU Q2ASCPU CC Link ID 13 2 1 Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 MELSEC A AnCPU A2UCPU CC Link ID 13 2 1 A2UCPU S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU S1 A2ACPUP21 S1 A2ACPUR21 S1 A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21 A1NCPU A1NCPUP21 A1NCPUR21 A2NCPU A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUR21 A2NCPU S1 A2NCPUP21 S1 A2NCPUR21 S1 A3NCPU A3NCPUP21 ...

Page 445: ...e following product numbers Q172CPU Product number N or later Q173CPU Product number M or later 3 Only the first step can be used on the extension base unit Q52B Q55B 4 The extension base unit Q5 B Q6 B can be used Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC A A0J2HCPU CC Link ID 13 2 1 A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU DC24 A2CCPU A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24 PRF A2CJCPU ...

Page 446: ...work Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF ETB CNC C70 Q173NCCPU CC Link ID 13 2 Robot controller CRnQ 700 Q172DRCPU CR750 Q Q172DRCPU CR751 Q Q172DRCPU CC Link ID 13 2 MELSEC FX FX0 FX0S FX0N FX1 FX2 FX2C FX1S FX1N FX2N FX1NC FX2NC FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3GE FX3U FX3UC CPU series CC Link module MELSEC iQ R Series Motion controller CPU MELSEC iQ R Series C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series RJ61BT11 MELSEC Q...

Page 447: ...nectable equipment Model name CC Link module 1 Communication type Cable model Max distance Option device Model MELSEC iQ R Series Motion controller CPU MELSEC iQ R Series C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series RJ61BT11 CC Link Ver 1 CC Link dedicated cable 2 3 GT15 J61BT13 5 26 GOTs MELSEC Q Q mode Motion controller CPU Q Series CNC C70 Robot controller CRnQ 700 QJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N CC Link Ver 1 CC...

Page 448: ...extension cable length and the length between stations vary depending on the cable type to be used and the transmission speed For details refer to the following manual CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual QJ61BT11N Control Communication Link System Master Local Module Type AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11 User s Manual Control Communication Link System Master Local Module Type AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11...

Page 449: ...ble type to be used and the transmission speed For details refer to the following manual CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual QJ61BT11N MELSEC L CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual 4 Specify Ver 2 as the mode setting in the Communication Settings to use it For details of the settings refer to the following the manual 13 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication set...

Page 450: ...s of the settings refer to the following the manual 13 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 6 Not available for the universal model QCPU CC Link module QCPU GOT Connection cable CC Link Ver2 ID Communication driver When MODEL GT15 J61BT13 CC Link communication unit is used CC Link ID When MODEL GT15 75J61BT13 Z CC Link communication unit is used Communication driver PLC Conne...

Page 451: ...sage environment 13 3 2 Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed POINT POINT POINT The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 1 1 2 I F communication setting 13 3 2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment 1 CC Link Ver 2 ID 2 3 4 Click Item Desc...

Page 452: ...ings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual GT User s Manual 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective Set value Description 0 Online 156kbps 1 Online 625kbps 2 Online 2 5Mbps 3 Online 5Mbps 4 Online 10Mbps A Hardware test 156kbps B Hardware test 625kbps C Hardware test 2 5Mbps D Ha...

Page 453: ...le For the switch setting example refer to the following 13 4 PLC Side Setting 2 When the switch setting is changed When changing the switch setting after mounting the MODEL GT15 75J61BT13 Z CC Link communication unit on the GOT reset the GOT Mode setting switch Description Set value Select the online mode Default 0 0 fixed Station number setting switch Description Set value Specify the station No...

Page 454: ... RJ61BT11 13 4 2 Connecting with Ver 1 Ver 2 compatibles mixed RJ61BT11 13 4 3 CC Link module Q Series Connecting with Ver 1 compatible QJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N 13 4 5 Connecting with Ver 2 compatible QJ61BT11N 13 4 6 Connecting with Ver 1 Ver 2 compatibles mixed QJ61BT11N 13 4 7 CC Link module QnA Series AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11 13 4 10 CC Link module A Series AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 13 4 11 Link device Expan...

Page 455: ...urn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again or reset the PLC CPU Unit parameter setting of GX Works3 1 Unit parameter a Unit parameter Necessary As necessary Not necessary 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings b Link refresh setting Necessary As necessary Not necessary CC Link module 1 Type Master station Station No Station No 0 Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode All connect count 1 Transmission speed 156kbps GOT...

Page 456: ... on the base unit slot 0 The Start I O No of the CC Link module is set to 0 Unit parameter setting of GX Works3 1 Unit parameter of GX Works3 a Unit parameter Item 1 Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station type Intelligent device station fixed Exclusive station count 2 Exclusive station 1 Reserve invalid station select No setting Intelligent buffer select word Use default value Item ...

Page 457: ...ation settings of GT Designer3 POINT POINT POINT Controller Setting of GT Designer3 For the setting method of Controller Setting of GT Designer3 refer to the following 13 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Station No 0 fixed Transmission speed 1 156kbps Parameter setting Engineering tool Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Special relay SB refresh device Spec...

Page 458: ...on No 0 Mode Remote net Ver 2 mode All connect count 2 Transmission speed 156kbps GOT Ver 1 compatible Use default value for settings other than the following Station type Intelligent device station Station No Station No 1 Number of stations occupied Exclusive station 1 Transmission speed 156kbps Use default value for settings other than the following GOT Ver 2 compatible Use default value for set...

Page 459: ...ner3 1 Communication Settings of station No 1 GOT 2 Communication Settings of station No 2 GOT Item 1 Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station type Ver 1 intelligent device station fixed Exclusive station count 2 Exclusive station 1 Reserve invalid station select No setting Intelligent buffer select word Use default value Item 1 Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station ty...

Page 460: ...cessary CC Link module 1 Type Master station Station No Station No 0 Mode Remote net Ver 2 mode All connect count 2 Transmission speed 156kbps GOT Ver 1 compatible Use default value for settings other than the following Station type Intelligent device station Station No Station No 1 Number of stations occupied Exclusive station 1 Transmission speed 156kbps Use default value for settings other than...

Page 461: ...ner3 1 Communication Settings of station No 1 GOT 2 Communication Settings of station No 2 GOT Item 1 Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station type Ver 1 intelligent device station fixed Exclusive station count 2 Exclusive station 1 Reserve invalid station select No setting Intelligent buffer select word Use default value Item 1 Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station ty...

Page 462: ...the GOT POINT POINT POINT When the switch setting is changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again or reset the PLC CPU CC Link module 1 Type Master station Station No Station No 0 Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode All connect count 1 Transmission speed 156kbps GOT Use the default value for settings other than the following Station type Intelligent device station Station No Station No 1 Number of stations o...

Page 463: ... changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection No of boards in module 1 Start I O No 0000H Operation setting Use default value Type Master station fixed Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode All connect count 1 Remote input RX X400 Remote output RY Y400 Remote ...

Page 464: ... changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the C Controller module Q Series either turn the C Controller module Q Series OFF and then ON or reset it Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Target module 1 192 168 3 3 Default Write authority Mark the checkbox User name 2 target Password 2 password Detailed settings Item 1 Set value Setting necessity at GOT con...

Page 465: ... refer to the following manual CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual QJ61BT11N System configuration 1 The CC Link module is mounted on the base unit slot 0 The Start I O No of the CC Link module is set to 0 POINT POINT POINT When connecting to Q170MCPU When connected to Q170MCPU the start I O No of the CC Link module is set to 70 Item Set value Station No 1 Station No 1 Transmission Rat...

Page 466: ...Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station number setting master station 0 fixed Transmission rate mode setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Transmission rate mode setting Online 156kbps 1 0 1 2 QJ61BT11N 0 5 0 5 0 8 1 2 7 6 5 4 3 STATION NO X10 X1 MODE QJ61BT11N RUN ERR SD MST L RUN L ERR RD S MST NC DA DB NC SLD DG FG C 4 Item Set value Setting nece...

Page 467: ...arameter to the PLC CPU operate the PLC CPU ether turning OFF and then ON or resetting Parameter setting when connecting to C Controller module Q Series Use SW3PVC CCPU E Ver 3 05F or later for the CC Link utility 1 Connection settings Necessary As necessary Not necessary 1 If the IP address of the C Controller module Q Series has been changed input the changed IP address or host name 2 If the acc...

Page 468: ...interface Communication settings Item 1 Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Number of modules 1 Target module 1 Start I O No 0000H Channel No Use default value Operation settings Type Master station Mode Remote net Ver 2 mode Expanded cyclic setting Single Occupied number Exclusive station 1 Error event input data status Clear CPU stop data link status Refresh Other settings Use default ...

Page 469: ...e setting switch Necessary As necessary Not necessary 1 Specify the same transmission speed as that of the GOT POINT POINT POINT When the switch setting has been changed Turn the PLC CPU OFF then ON again or reset the PLC CPU CC Link module 1 Type Master station Station No Station No 0 Mode Remote net Ver 2 mode All connect count 2 Transmission speed 156kbps GOT Ver 1 compatible Use default value ...

Page 470: ...tem Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection No of boards in module 1 Start I O No 1 0000H Operation setting Use default value Type Master station fixed Mode Remote net Ver 2 mode All connect count 2 Remote input RX X400 Remote output RY Y400 Remote register RWr D300 Remote register RWw D200 Special relay SB SB0 Special register SW SW0 Retry count Use default value Automatic reconnection stat...

Page 471: ...ser name and password 2 CC Link Utility s Parameter Settings a Parameter settings Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Target module 1 192 168 3 3 Default Write authority Mark the checkbox User name 2 target Password 2 password Detailed settings Item 1 Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Number of modules 1 Target module 1 Start I O No 0000H Channel No Use default value Ope...

Page 472: ...13 3 3 Switch setting Only when MODEL GT15 75J61BT13 Z CC Link communication unit is used Station information settings Reserve invalid station select Sta No 1 No setting Sta No 2 No setting Intelligent buffer select word Use default value Item Set value Station No 1 Station No 1 Transmission Rate 0 Online 156kbps Mode Ver 1 Remote net Ver 1 mode Expanded Cyclic Single Use default value Number of s...

Page 473: ...ssary As necessary Not necessary 1 Set the Start I O No of the CC Link module according to the system configuration CC Link module 1 Type Master station Station No Station No 0 Mode Remote net Ver 1 mode All connect count 1 Transmission speed 156kbps GOT Use the default value for settings other than the following Station type Intelligent device station Station No Station No 1 Expanded cyclic setti...

Page 474: ...uilt in CPU For details on the CC Link function built in CPU refer to the following manual MELSEC L CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual System configuration Example when using CC Link module L Series Item 1 Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station type Intelligent device station fixed Exclusive station count 2 Exclusive station 1 Reserve invalid station select No setting ...

Page 475: ...method of Controller Setting of GT Designer3 refer to the following 13 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection No of boards in module 1 Start I O No 1 0000H Operation setting Use default value Type Master station fixed Mode Remote net Ver 2 mode All connect count 1 Remote input RX X400 Remote output RY Y400 Remote register RWr D...

Page 476: ...mission speed 156kbps Controller Setting of GT Designer3 Setting of the CC Link communication unit Switch settings of CC Link module QnA Series Parameter setting Station number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station number setting master station 0 fixed Mode setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Mode setting Online Remote...

Page 477: ... the PLC CPU and the CC Link module use the function version B or later 1 Setting from Network parameter of GX Developer a Network parameter Necessary As necessary Not necessary Transmission speed setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Transmission speed setting 156kbps 1 0 Condition setting switches Setting switch Description Set value Setting necessityat GOT con...

Page 478: ...lag for parameter setting M102 M103 Flag for data link startup D0 Number of connected modules D1 Number of retry D2 Automatic reconnection station count D3 Operation specification in the case of CPU failure D4 Reserved station specification Station No 1 to Station No 16 D5 Error invalid station specification Station No 1 to Station No 16 D6 Station data first module D400 Error code in the case of ...

Page 479: ...her turning OFF and then ON or resetting Data link startup normal completion buffer memory Data link startup abnormal completion buffer memory Turn on only during 1 scan after RUN Module ready Module error Module ready Module error Number of connected modules 1 module Number of retry 3 times Number of automatic return stations 1 station Reserved station specification No specification Refresh insru...

Page 480: ...stem configuration 1 The CC Link module is mounted on the base unit slot 0 The Start I O No of the CC Link module is set to 0 Item Set value Station No 1 Station No 1 Transmission Rate 0 Online 156kbps Mode Ver 1 Remote net Ver 1 mode Expanded Cyclic Single Use default value Number of stations occupied 1 Station Input for Error Station 0 Clear Retry 3times Use default value Timeout Time 3sec Use d...

Page 481: ...4 1 3 AJ61BT11 E R R O R R A T E B T E S T 1 B RATE 0 156K 1 625K 2 2 5M 3 5M 4 10M ON MODE 0 ONLINE A R 2 OFFLINE RUN ERR MST S MST LOCAL CPU R W SW M S PRM TIME LINE L RUN L ERR OFF S MST M L HOLD CLEAR 3 4 1 2 SW 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON 10 8 6 4 2 9 7 5 3 1 NC DA NC FG SLD NC NC NC DB DG STATION NO 10 x x 156K 625K 2 5M 5M 10M TEST S0 S1 S2 SD RD 0 8 7 5 3 2 0 8 7 5 3 2 0 8 7 5 3 2 C 8 4 0 1 ONLINE ...

Page 482: ...m Master Local Module Type AJ61BT11 A1SJ61BT11 User s Manual b Device used by user Device Application M0 RLPA instruction normal completion flag M1 RLPA instruction error completion flag M100 Network parameter setting flag M101 Automatic refresh parameter setting flag D0 Synchronous mode valid invalid D1 Number of connected modules D2 Station data D3 Send buffer size D4 Receive buffer size D5 Auto...

Page 483: ... next page Setting of network parameter with dedicated RLPA instruction Setting of automatic refresh parameter with dedicated RRPA instruction Module ready Module error Module ready RLPA error completion Module error RLPA error completion Synchronous mode Invalid Number of connected modules 1 module Send buffer size 64 words Receive buffer size 64 words Automatic update buffer size 128 words CC Li...

Page 484: ...destination device head No 400 RY refresh destination Y No of refresh points 32 RY refresh destination device head No 400 RW head No RW0 RW refresh destination D RW refresh destination device head No 200 SB head No SB0 SB refresh destination B No of refresh points 512 No of refresh points 260 SB refresh destination device head number 0 SW head number SW0 SW refresh destination W No of refresh poin...

Page 485: ...ules D1 Number of retry D2 Automatic reconnection station count D3 Operation specification in the case of CPU failure D4 Reserved station specification Station No 1 to Station No 16 D5 Error invalid station specification Station No 1 to Station No 16 D6 Station data first module D400 Error code in the case of data link startup failure Buffer memory address Item Set value Decimal Hex 1 1H Number of...

Page 486: ...Turn on only during 1 scan after RUN Module ready Module error Module ready Module error Number of connected modules 1 module Number of retry 3 times Number of automatic return stations 1 station Reserved station specification No specification Refresh instruction Data link startup request buffer memory address Error code reading SW0068 Error invalid station specification No specification Station d...

Page 487: ...ation unit Only when MODEL GT15 75J61BT13 Z CC Link communication unit is used POINT POINT POINT Setting of the CC Link communication unit For the setting method of the CC Link communication unit refer to the following 13 3 3 Switch setting Only when MODEL GT15 75J61BT13 Z CC Link communication unit is used Item Set value Station No 1 Station No 1 Transmission Rate 0 Online 156kbps Mode Ver 1 Remo...

Page 488: ... CC Link connection intelligent device station For CC Link connection intelligent device station the data link is started approximately 10 seconds after the GOT startup When a network error occurs in the system alarm In the CC Link connection intelligent device station when a network error occurs in the system alarm the system alarm display cannot be canceled even though the causes are removed To ...

Page 489: ...r the device of the Motion CPU area CPU No 2 When the CPU No is set to 0 or 1 the device on the PLC CPU area CPU No 1 is monitored When the CPU No is set to the number other than 0 to 2 a communication error occurs and the monitoring cannot be executed For setting the CPU No refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual Example Setting dialog box of the bit device Connect...

Page 490: ...13 50 13 CC Link CONNECTION INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION 13 5 Precautions ...

Page 491: ... NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC Link CONNECTION INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION 14 CC Link CONNECTION Via G4 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 14 1 14 CC Link CONNECTION Via G4 14 1 Connectable Model List 14 2 14 2 System Configuration 14 7 14 3 Connection Diagram 14 9 14 4 GOT Side Settings 14 10 14 5 PLC Side Settings 14 12 14 6 Precautions 14 18 ...

Page 492: ... next page Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC iQ R Series R04CPU CC Link G4 R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU R04ENCPU R08ENCPU R16ENCPU R32ENCPU R120ENCPU R08SFCPU R16SFCPU R32SFCPU R120SFCPU Motion controller CPU MELSEC iQ R Series R16MTCPU CC Link G4 R32MTCPU C Controller module MELSEC iQ R Series R12CCPU V CC Link G4 MELSEC iQ F Series FX5U F...

Page 493: ...tation can be monitored in GT11 and GT10 3 For GT10 do not include in the multiple CPU system configuration Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC Q Q mode Q00JCPU CC Link G4 2 2 2 14 2 1 Q00CPU 1 Q01CPU 1 Q02CPU 1 Q02HCPU 1 Q06HCPU 1 Q12HCPU 1 Q25HCPU 1 Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU CC Link G4 2 3 3 Q12PRHCPU Main base Q25PRHCPU Main base Q12PRHCPU Extension base Q25PRHC...

Page 494: ...Q26DHCCPU LS 1 1 MELSEC QS QS001CPU MELSEC L L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU BT L02CPU P L06CPU P L26CPU P L26CPU PBT L02SCPU L02SCPU P CC Link G4 1 1 1 14 2 2 MELSEC Q A mode Q02CPU A Q02HCPU A Q06HCPU A MELSEC QnA QnACPU Q2ACPU Q2ACPU S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU MELSEC QnA QnASCPU Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 MELSEC A AnCPU A2UCPU A2UCPU S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU S1 ...

Page 495: ...following product numbers Q172CPU Product number N or later Q173CPU Product number M or later 3 Only the first step can be used on the extension base unit Q52B Q55B 4 Only master station can be monitored in GT11 and GT10 5 The extension base unit Q5 B Q6 B can be used Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC A AnSCPU A2USCPU A2USCPU S1 A2USHCPU S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24 R2 A1SHCPU A2SC...

Page 496: ...MELSECNET H Remote I O station QJ72LP25 25 QJ72LP25G QJ72BR15 CC Link IE Field Network head module LJ72GF15 T2 CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF ETB CNC C70 Q173NCCPU CC Link G4 1 14 2 1 Robot controller CRnQ 700 Q172DRCPU CR750 Q Q172DRCPU CR751 Q Q172DRCPU CC Link G4 1 14 2 1 MELSEC FX FX0 FX0S FX0N FX1 FX2 FX2C FX1S FX1N FX2N FX1NC FX2NC FX3S FX3G FX3GC FX3GE FX3U FX3UC CPU...

Page 497: ...m Master Local Module User s Manual QJ61BT11N 4 For the connection to GOT refer to the connection diagram RS 422 connection diagram 1 5 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 CC Link G4 Communication driver CC Link module QCPU Peripheral connection module Connection cable 1 GOT Connection cable 2 PLC Connection cable 1 Peripheral connection modul...

Page 498: ...cation type Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Option device Model L02CPU L26CPU BT L02CPU P L26CPU PBT LJ61BT1 1 CC Link dedicated cable 2 3 AJ65B T R2N RS 232 GT09 C30R2 9P or RS 232 connection diagram 1 15m Built into GOT 1 GOT for 1 peripheral connection module RS 232 connection diagram 2 15m Built into GOT AJ65B T G4 S3 RS 422 GT01 C30R4 25P 3m GT01 C100R4 25P 10m GT01 C200R4 ...

Page 499: ... or less 2 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 1 4 1 GOT connector specifications Connecting terminating resistors 1 GOT side When connecting a PLC to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT a For GT16 GT15 GT12 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to Disable b For GT14 GT11 GT10 Set the terminating resistor selector ...

Page 500: ...1 1 2 I F communication setting 14 4 2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment POINT POINT POINT 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication Settings after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual GT User s ...

Page 501: ...ECTION Via G4 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION HINT HINT HINT Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the controller By setting GOT internal device GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller For example faulty station that has communication timeout can be cut from the system For details of the setting contents of GOT internal device refer to the foll...

Page 502: ...Data link transmission speed setting switch Necessary As necessary Not necessary Model Reference Peripheral connection module AJ65BT G4 S3 14 5 1 AJ65BT R2N 14 5 2 CC Link module 1 Station type Station No Mode All connect count Transmission speed AJ65BT G4 S3 Station type Station No Number of stations occupied Transmission speed GOT Setting example Transmission speed 9600bps Master station Station...

Page 503: ...User s Manual 2 CC Link module For details of the CC Link module refer to the following manual CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual QJ61BT11N 3 CC Link built in CPU For details on the CC Link function built in CPU refer to the following manual MELSEC L CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual System configuration 1 The Start I O No of the CC Link module is set to 0 Operation se...

Page 504: ... mode setting switch to 5 MELSOFT connection mode 2 RS 232 transmission setting switch Turn OFF SW1 through SW8 of the RS 232 transmission setting switch If any switch of SW1 through SW8 is ON setting error will occur RUN LED turns off Station number setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection AJ65BT R2N station number setting 1 to 64 Data link transmission speed setti...

Page 505: ...itch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Station number setting master station 0 fixed Transmission rate mode setting switch Description Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Transmission rate mode setting 0 156kbps 1 625kbps 2 2 5Mbps 3 5Mbps 4 10Mbps 1 2 QJ61BT11 QJ61BT11N 0 5 0 5 0 8 1 2 7 6 5 4 3 STATION NO X10 X1 MODE QJ61BT11N RUN ERR SD MST L RUN L ERR RD S MST...

Page 506: ...to monitor after the L RUN LED of AJ65BT G4 S3 turns on It does not monitor while the L RUN LED turns off 14 5 5 Parameter setting when connecting to C Controller module Q Series Use SW3PVC CCPU E Ver 3 05F or later for the C Controller module setting utility 1 Connection settings Necessary As necessary Not necessary 1 If the IP address of the C Controller module Q Series has been changed input th...

Page 507: ...T Designer3 POINT POINT POINT Controller Setting of GT Designer3 For Controller Setting of GT Designer3 refer to the following 14 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Item Set value Setting necessity at GOT connection Number of modules 1 Target module 1 Start I O No 0000H Channel No Use default value Operation setting type Master station fixed Mode 1 Remote net Ver 1 mode Exp...

Page 508: ...T starts before the SD card becomes available a system alarm occurs Adjust the opening screen time in the GOT setup so that no system alarm occurs GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual Connection to Q17nDCPU Q170MCPU CNC C70 CRnQ 700 The Q17nDCPU Q170MCPU CNC C70 and CRnQ 700 are applicable to the CC Link network system Ver 2 only For connecting to the CC Link Via G4 network system set the CC ...

Page 509: ... FA DEVICE CONNECTIONS 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15 1 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16 1 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17 1 18 CNC CONNECTION 18 1 19 ENERGY MEASURING UNIT ELECTRIC MULTI MEASURING INSTRUMENT CONNECTION 19 1 ...

Page 510: ......

Page 511: ...nk CONNECTION INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION 14 CC Link CONNECTION Via G4 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 15 1 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15 1 Connectable Model List 15 2 15 2 System Configuration 15 3 15 3 Connection Diagram 15 24 15 4 GOT Side Settings 15 32 15 5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settings 15 34 15 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 15 50 15 7 Precautions 15 53 ...

Page 512: ...munication type Refer to FREQROL FREQROL A500 A500L RS 485 15 2 1 FREQROL F500 F500L FREQROL V500 V500L FREQROL E500 RS 485 15 2 2 FREQROL S500 S500E FREQROL F500J FREQROL D700 FREQROL F700PJ FREQROL E700 RS 485 15 2 3 FREQROL A700 RS 485 15 2 4 FREQROL F700 FREQROL F700P FREQROL A800 F800 RS 485 15 2 5 Sensorless servo FREQROL E700EX RS 485 15 2 3 MELIPM MD CX522 K A0 RS 485 15 2 6 ...

Page 513: ...on GT1655 and GT155 2 Connect to the PU port of the inverter GOT Connection cable Computer link option Inverter FREQROL 500 700 800 SENSORLESS SERVO Communication driver Inverter Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment Model name Computer link option Communication type Connection diagram number Max distance Option device Model FREQROL A500 A500L F500 F500L V500 V500L 2 RS 485 RS485 co...

Page 514: ...nverter Inverter Connection cable 1 FREQROL 500 700 800 SENSORLESS SERVO Communication driver Inverter Terminal cable Connection cable 1 Distributor 3 Connection cable 2 GOT Max distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Communication type Connection diagram number Model name Connection diagram number Option device Model FREQROL A500 A500L F500 F500L V500 V500L 2 RS 485 RS485 connection d...

Page 515: ... IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 12 CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC Link CONNECTION INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION 14 CC Link CONNECTION Via G4 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION GT1030 L D GT1030 H D B or later 31 A or earlier 10 GT1020 L D E or later 31 D or earlier 10 Model name Hardware version Number of connectable Inverter ...

Page 516: ...O Communication driver Inverter Connection cable GOT Max distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Computer link option Communication type Connection diagram number Option device Model FREQROL A500 A500L F500 F500L V500 V500L FR A5NR RS 485 RS485 connection diagram 4 GT16 C02R4 9S 0 2m 500m 31 inverters for one GOT 2 GT15 RS2T4 9P 1 GT15 RS4 9S Built into GOT RS485 connection diagram 12 ...

Page 517: ...J When connecting to one inverter 1 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 2 Connect to the PU port of the inverter Inverter GOT Connection cable FREQROL 500 700 800 SENSORLESS SERVO Communication driver Inverter Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment Model name Communication type Connection diagram number Max distance Option device...

Page 518: ... Inverter Connection cable 1 Inverter FREQROL 500 700 800 SENSORLESS SERVO Communication driver Inverter Terminal cable Connection cable 1 Distributor 3 Connection cable 2 GOT Max distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Communication type Connection diagram number Model name Connection diagram number Option device Model FREQROL E500 S500 S500E F500J D700 2 RS 485 RS485 connection diagr...

Page 519: ... IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 12 CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC Link CONNECTION INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION 14 CC Link CONNECTION Via G4 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION GT1030 L D GT1030 H D B or later 31 A or earlier 10 GT1020 L D E or later 31 D or earlier 10 Model name Hardware version Number of connectable Inverter ...

Page 520: ...00 700 800 SENSORLESS SERVO Communication driver Inverter Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment Model name Control terminal option Communication type Connection diagram number Max distance Option device Model FREQROL E700 sensorless servo FREQROL E700EX 2 RS 485 RS485 connection diagram 1 500m GT16 C02R4 9S 0 2m 1 GOT for 1 inverter GT15 RS2T4 9P 1 GT15 RS4 9S Built into GOT RS485 c...

Page 521: ...ser s Manual GT10 User s Manual GOT Distributor Connection cable 2 Connection cable 1 Terminal cable Connection cable 1 Distributor Connection cable 1 Inverter sensorless servo Inverter sensorless servo FREQROL 500 700 800 SENSORLESS SERVO Communication driver Inverter Terminating cable Connection cable 1 Distributor 3 Connection cable 2 GOT Max distance Number of connectable equipment Model name ...

Page 522: ... 12 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15 2 System Configuration GT1030 L D GT1030 H D B or later 31 A or earlier 10 GT1020 L D E or later 31 D or earlier 10 Model name Hardware version Number of connectable Inverter ...

Page 523: ...lowing manual GT11 User s Manual GT10 User s Manual GOT Connection cable Control terminal option Control terminal option Inverter sensorless servo Inverter sensorless servo FREQROL 500 700 800 SENSORLESS SERVO Communication driver Inverter Connection cable GOT Max distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Control terminal option Communication type Connection diagram number Option device ...

Page 524: ...able GOT Number of connectable equipment Model name Communication type Connection diagram number Max distance Option device Model FREQROL A700 F700 F700P PU port RS 485 RS485 connection diagram 1 500m GT16 C02R4 9S 0 2m 1 GOT for 1 inverter GT15 RS2T4 9P 1 GT15 RS4 9S Built into GOT RS485 connection diagram 10 500m Built into GOT FREQROL A700 F700 F700P Built in RS485 terminal block RS 485 RS485 c...

Page 525: ...rdware version refer to the following manual GT11 User s Manual GT10 User s Manual GOT Distributor Connection cable 2 Connection cable 1 Terminal cable Connection cable 1 Distributor Inverter Connection cable 1 Inverter FREQROL 500 700 800 SENSORLESS SERVO Communication driver Inverter Terminal cable Connection cable 1 Distributor 2 Connection cable 2 GOT Max distance Number of connectable equipme...

Page 526: ...ration GT1055 QSBD GT1050 QBBD C or later 31 B or earlier 10 GT1045 QSBD GT1040 QBBD A or later 31 GT1030 L D GT1030 H D B or later 31 A or earlier 10 GT1020 L D E or later 31 D or earlier 10 Model name Hardware version Number of connectable Inverter ...

Page 527: ...n refer to the following manual GT11 User s Manual GT10 User s Manual Inverter GOT Connection cable Inverter FREQROL 500 700 800 SENSORLESS SERVO Communication driver Inverter Connection cable GOT Max distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Communication type Connection diagram number Option device Model FREQROL A700 F700 F700P Built in RS485 terminal block RS 485 RS485 connection diag...

Page 528: ... cable GOT Number of connectable equipment Model name Communication type Connection diagram number Max distance Option device Model FREQROL A800 F800 PU port RS 485 RS485 connection diagram 1 500m GT16 C02R4 9S 0 2m 1 GOT for 1 inverter GT15 RS2T4 9P 1 GT15 RS4 9S Built into GOT RS485 connection diagram 10 500m Built into GOT FREQROL A800 F800 Built in RS485 terminal block RS 485 RS485 connection ...

Page 529: ...tributor Connection cable 2 Connection cable 1 Terminal cable Connection cable 1 Distributor Inverter Connection cable 1 Inverter FREQROL 500 700 800 SENSORLESS SERVO Communication driver Inverter Terminal cable Connection cable 1 Distributor 2 Connection cable 2 GOT Max distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Communication type Connection diagram number Model name Connection diagram n...

Page 530: ...on cable Inverter Inverter Connection cable GOT Max distance Number of connectable equipment Model name Communication type Connection diagram number Option device Model FREQROL A800 F800 Built in RS485 terminal block RS 485 RS485 connection diagram 6 GT16 C02R4 9S 0 2m 500m 31 inverters for one GOT 2 GT15 RS2T4 9P 1 GT15 RS4 9S Built into GOT RS485 connection diagram 14 Built into GOT Model name H...

Page 531: ...en connecting to one inverter 1 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 2 Connect to the PU port of the inverter Inverter GOT Connection cable FREQROL 500 700 800 SENSORLESS SERVO Communication driver Inverter Connection cable GOT Number of connectable Model name equipment Model name Communication type Connection diagram number Max distance Option...

Page 532: ...ibutor Inverter Connection cable 1 Inverter FREQROL 500 700 800 SENSORLESS SERVO Communication driver Inverter Terminating cable Connection cable 1 Distributor 3 Connection cable 2 GOT Max distance Number of connectable Model name equipment Model name Communication type Connection diagram number Model name Connection diagram number Option device Model MD CX522 K A0 2 RS 485 RS485 connection diagra...

Page 533: ...k IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 12 CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC Link CONNECTION INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION 14 CC Link CONNECTION Via G4 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION GT1030 L D GT1030 H D B or later 31 A or earlier 10 GT1020 L D E or later 31 D or earlier 10 Model name Hardware version Number of connectable Inverter ...

Page 534: ... jumper to RDB and RDR The terminating resister jumper is packed together with the FR A5NR 2 For GT16 GT15 and GT12 set the terminating resistor to Disable For GT14 GT11 and GT10 set the terminating resistor to 330 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT GOT side 1 RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA RSB CSA CSB SG FG 5 4 3 6 2 8 1 2 7 1 6 3 8 4 9 5 SDA SDB RDA RDB P5S P5S SG Inverter or Distributor side Modular conne...

Page 535: ... of GOT side which will be a terminal to 330 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 1 For GT16 GT15 and GT12 set the terminating resistor to Disable For GT14 GT11 and GT10 set the terminating resistor to 330 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 2 RDA2 RDB2 SDA2 and SDB2 terminals of the RS485 terminal block built into the inverter cannot be used RS485 connection diagram 4 For GT16 GT15 GT14 GT12 GT11 GT...

Page 536: ...o 330 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 2 Turn ON 100 the terminator switch for the FR E7TR RS485 connection diagram 6 For GT16 GT15 GT14 GT12 GT11 GT105 GT104 SG SDB SDA RDB RDA RSA RSB CSA CSB SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2 GND SDA1 SDB1 RDA1 RDB1 GND GND RDB1 RDA1 SDB1 SDA1 5 6 1 7 2 3 8 4 9 SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2 GND SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2 GND SDA1 SDB1 RDA1 RDB1 GND GOT side 2 Built in RS 485 terminal block ...

Page 537: ... The terminating resister jumper is packed together with the FR A5NR 2 Set the terminating resistor of the GOT side to 330 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT RS485 connection diagram 8 For GT16 GT15 GT14 GT12 GT11 GT105 GT104 RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA RSB CSA CSB SG FG SDB SDA RDB RDA SG SDA SDB RDA RDB SG 2 7 1 6 3 8 4 9 5 SDA SDB RDA RDB SG SDB SDA RDB RDA SG SDA SDB RDA RDB SDB SDA RDB RDA SG SG GOT ...

Page 538: ...ting resistor of the GOT side to 330 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT RS485 connection diagram 12 For GT1030 GT1020 RDA RDB SDA SDB SG RDR FR A5NR side terminal block Station No 0 FR A5NR side terminal block Station No 1 FR A5NR side terminal block Station No n RDA RDB SDA SDB SG RDR RDA RDB SDA SDB SG RDR GOT side 2 terminal block 1 SDA SDB RDA RDB SG RSA RSB CSA CSB RS485 connection diagram 13...

Page 539: ...h will be a terminal to 330 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 1 Set the terminating resistor of the GOT side to 330 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT RS485 connection diagram 14 For GT1030 GT1020 SG SDB SDA RDB RDA RSA RSB CSA CSB SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2 GND Built in RS 485 terminal block Station No 0 Built in RS 485 terminal block Station No 1 Built in RS 485 terminal block 1 Station No n SDA2 SDB2...

Page 540: ...hich will be a terminal to 330 RS485 connection diagram 16 For GT1030 GT1020 SDA SDB RDA RDB SG RSA RSB CSA CSB SDB SDA RDB RDA SG FR E7TR side terminal block Station No 0 FR E7TR side terminal block Station No 1 FR E7TR side terminal block 1 Station No 2 RDA RDB SDA SDB SG RDA RDB SDA SDB SG SDB SDA RDB RDA SG RDA RDB SDA SDB SG SDB SDA RDB RDA SG GOT side 2 terminal block ...

Page 541: ...n the FR E7TR control terminal option Mount the FR E7TR to the E700 series Connecting terminating resistors 1 GOT side When connecting a PLC to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT a For GT16 GT15 GT12 Set the terminating resistor setting switch b For GT14 GT11 GT10 Set the terminating resistor selector switch For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the fo...

Page 542: ...rface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication Settings after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manuals GT User s Manual 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 2 3 4 Click Item Descriptio...

Page 543: ...CC Link CONNECTION Via G4 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION HINT HINT HINT Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the controller By setting GOT internal device GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller For example faulty station that has communication timeout can be cut from the system For details of the setting contents of GOT internal device refer...

Page 544: ...3 Inverter default values No need to change 4 When being monitored from the GOT the parameter n1 through n7 correspond with Pr 331 through Pr 337 and the parameter n10 through n12 correspond with Pr 340 through Pr 342 Numbers in brackets show the parameter number when the parameter unit is in use 5 There is no Protocol selection setting on the inverter side GOT connection destination Parameters co...

Page 545: ...e sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings 3 Inverter default values No need to change 4 There is no Protocol selection setting on the inverter side 5 The setting is required for Frequency setting command selection GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr 79 Pr 117 to Pr 124 Pr 146 Pr 342 Setting item 1 Parameter No Se...

Page 546: ...ecting to the PU connector on the inverter side 5 There is no Protocol selection setting on the inverter side 6 The setting is required on the inverter side when FR A5NR is used GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr 79 Pr 117 to Pr 124 FR A5NR Option unit Pr 79 Pr 331 to Pr 337 Pr 340 to Pr 342 Setting item 1 Parameter No Set value Contents of setting PU c...

Page 547: ...s No need to change 4 Since the value has been set as a default no setting is required when connecting to the PU connector on the inverter side 5 There is no Protocol selection setting on the inverter side 6 The setting is required on the inverter side when FR A5NR is used GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr 79 Pr 117 to Pr 124 Pr 342 FR A5NR Option unit...

Page 548: ...nnecting to the PU connector on the inverter side 5 There is no Protocol selection setting on the inverter side 6 The setting is required on the inverter side when FR A5NR is used GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr 79 Pr 117 to Pr 124 Pr 342 FR A5NR Option unit Pr 79 Pr 331 to Pr 337 Pr 340 to Pr 342 Setting item 1 Parameter No Set value Contents of set...

Page 549: ...ging the settings on the GOT be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings 3 Inverter default values No need to change GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr 79 Pr 117 to Pr 124 Pr 340 Pr 342 Pr 549 FR E7TR RS 485 terminal block Setting item 1 Parameter No Set value Contents of setting PU communication station number P...

Page 550: ...inverter to correspond with the GOT settings 3 Inverter default values No need to change GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr 79 Pr 117 to Pr 124 Pr 340 Pr 342 Pr 549 Setting item 1 Parameter No Set value Contents of setting PU communication station number Pr 117 0 to 31 15 5 14 Station number setting PU communication speed 2 Pr 118 192 3 19200bps PU comm...

Page 551: ...o the PU connector on the inverter side GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr 79 Pr 117 to Pr 124 Pr 340 Pr 342 RS 485 terminal Pr 79 Pr 331 to Pr 337 Pr 340 to Pr 342 Pr 549 Setting item 1 Parameter No Set value Contents of setting PU connector RS 485 PU communication station number RS 485 communication station number Pr 117 Pr 331 0 to 31 15 5 14 Station...

Page 552: ...her than PU communication station number and Communication EEPROM write selection can be automatically set in a batch to the default communication settings of the GOT side 1 When monitoring the value of Pr 999 9999 is always monitored Parameter No Set value Description Operation in parameter setting mode Pr 999 1 10 GOT Initial settings PU connector AUTO GOT 1 Write 11 GOTInitial settings RS 485 t...

Page 553: ...INT HINT Automatic setting with Pr 999 If Pr 999 is set as the following the communication settings other than PU communication station number and Communication EEPROM write selection can be automatically set in a batch to the default communication settings of the GOT side 1 When monitoring the value of Pr 999 9999 is always monitored GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter...

Page 554: ...ng item 1 Parameter No Set value Contents of setting PU connector RS 485 PU communication station number RS 485 communication station number Pr 117 Pr 331 0 to 31 15 5 14 Station number setting PU communication speed RS 485 communication speed 2 Pr 118 Pr 332 192 4 19200bps PU communication stop bit length RS 485 communication stop bit length 2 Pr 119 Pr 333 10 Data length 7bit Stop bit length 1bi...

Page 555: ...lowing the communication settings other than PU communication station number and Communication EEPROM write selection can be automatically set in a batch to the default communication settings of the GOT side 1 When monitoring the value of Pr 999 9999 is always monitored 2 Inverters available for automatic batch setting Parameters are not automatically set in a batch depending on the SERIAL product...

Page 556: ...ctor Pr 79 Pr 117 to Pr 124 Pr 340 Pr 342 RS 485 terminal Pr 79 Pr 331 to Pr 337 Pr 340 to Pr 342 Pr 549 Setting item 1 Parameter No Set value Contents of setting PU connector RS 485 PU communication station number RS 485 communication station number Pr 117 Pr 331 0 to 31 15 5 14 Station number setting PU communication speed RS 485 communication speed 2 Pr 118 Pr 332 192 4 19200bps PU communicatio...

Page 557: ...names described in the manual of FREQROL E700 series 2 Settings on the GOT can be changed When changing the settings on the GOT be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings 3 Sensorless servo FREQROL E700EX series default values No need to change Parameter No Set value Description Operation in parameter setting mode Pr 999 1 10 GOT Initial settings PU connec...

Page 558: ...IPM series 2 Settings on the GOT can be changed When changing the settings on the GOT be sure to change the parameters on the inverter to correspond with the GOT settings 3 Inverter default values No need to change GOT connection destination Parameters corresponding to inverter PU connector Pr 79 Pr 117 to Pr 124 Setting item 1 Parameter No Set value Contents of setting Communication station numbe...

Page 559: ...fy the station number of the inverter of which data is to be changed 2 Indirect specification When setting the device indirectly specify the station number of the inverter of which data is to be changed using the 16 bit GOT internal data register GD10 to GD25 When specifying the station No from 100 to 155 on GT Designer3 the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to the station No specification will be ...

Page 560: ...riting is possible for WS devices More than one WS cannot turn on at once Except the turned on WS device the other WS devices turn off Bits of SP122 word device and SP121 word device are assigned to WS0 to WS7 and WS8 to WS15 respectively When more than one WS turns on at once convert the values for the bit devices that are assigned to the word device into values for the word device Write the conv...

Page 561: ...ing item and set data 1 The description function of input terminal may be changed by the parameter of the inverter side Check the function of the inverter used Inverter User s Manual Application Communication operation and setting 2 Run command An example with FREQROL A700 series is shown below For the setting items of other than the FREQROL A700 series refer to the following manual User s Manual ...

Page 562: ...ly FREQROL E500 S500 E F500J D700 F700PJ E700 series Pr37 0 SP127 1 2 Only reading is possible for SP111 to SP114 These devices cannot be used for a write object numerical input etc 3 Only writing is possible for SP124 and SP125 These devices cannot be used for read object Device name 1 Description A0 Second alarm in past A1 Latest alarm A2 Fourth alarm in past A3 Third alarm in past A4 Sixth alar...

Page 563: ...f the inverter side from GOT If changed the communication to the inverter cannot be made 2 When setting 8888 or 9999 to inverter parameter Pr 8888 and 9999 designate special function When specifying from the GOT it will be as follows Screen switching devices system information devices Make sure to use GD for screen switching devices and system information devices when the GOT is connected to only ...

Page 564: ...15 54 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 15 7 Precautions ...

Page 565: ...nk CONNECTION INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION 14 CC Link CONNECTION Via G4 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16 1 16 SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16 1 Connectable Model List 16 2 16 2 System Configuration 16 3 16 3 Connection Diagram 16 9 16 4 GOT Side Settings 16 15 16 5 Setting on Servo Amplifier Side 16 17 16 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 20 16 7 Precautions 16 58 ...

Page 566: ...RVO J4 of software version A3 or a later version 2 The GT15 and GT11 cannot be connected to MR J4 A RJ Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELSERVO J2 Super MR J2S A RS 232 RS 422 16 2 1 MR J2S CP MR J2S CL MELSERVO J2M MR J2M P8A RS 232 RS 422 16 2 2 MR J2M DU MELSERVO J3 MR J3 A RS 232 RS 422 16 2 3 MR J3 T MELSERVO J4 1 MR J4 A MR J4 A RJ RS 232 RS 422 2 2 MELSERVO JE MR JE A RS...

Page 567: ...ication driver Servo amplifier Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment Series name Communication type Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Option device Model MELSERVO J2 Super 1 RS 232 MR CPCATCBL3M 3m or RS 232 connection diagram 1 15m GT15 RS2 9P 1 GOT for 1 servo amplifier Built into GOT MR CPCATCBL3M 3m or RS 232 connection diagram 1 RS 232 connection diagram 2 15m ...

Page 568: ...r Max distance Option device Model MELSERVO J2M 1 RS 232 MR CPCATCBL3M 3m or RS 232 connection diagram 1 15m GT15 RS2 9P 1 GOT for 1 servo amplifier Built into GOT MR CPCATCBL3M 3m or RS 232 connection diagram 1 RS 232 connection diagram 2 15m Built into GOT RS 232 connection diagram 3 15m Built into GOT GOT Connection cable Servo amplifier Servo amplifier CHARGE MITSUBISHI MELSERVO J4 J3 J2S M JE...

Page 569: ...NY LIMITED The cables RS PCATCBL 0 5M 0 5m RS 422SCBL 2M 2m are packed together Use the provided cables to connect devices FA T RS40VS stopped being produced at the end of March 2013 The replacement product is not produced 4 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 RS 422 232 converter GOT Connection cable Servo amplifier MELSERVO J4 J3 J2S M JE Co...

Page 570: ...unication driver Servo amplifier Terminating cable Connection cable 1 Distributor 2 Connection cable 2 Distributor 2 Connection cable 3 GOT Max distance Number of connectable equipment Series name Communication type Connection diagram number Connection diagram number Model name Connection diagram number Model name Connection diagram number Option device Model MELS ERVO J4 1 J3 1 RS 422 RS 422 conn...

Page 571: ...h 2013 The replacement product is not produced 3 The distributor is a product manufactured by HAKKO ELECTRIC CO LTD For details contact HAKKO ELECTRIC CO LTD GOT Distributor Connection cable 2 Connection cable 3 Terminal cable Connection cable 1 RS 422 232 converter Distributor Connection cable 1 Servo amplifier Servo amplifier MELSERVO J4 J3 J2S M JE Communication driver Servo amplifier Terminati...

Page 572: ...ommunication driver GOT Connection cable Servo amplifier Servo amplifier CHARGE MITSUBISHI CHARGE MITSUBISHI Servo amplifier Connection cable GOT Max distance Number of connectable equipment Series name Communication type Connection diagram number Option device Model MELSERVO JE 1 RS 422 RS 422 connection diagram 9 Built into GOT 30m Up to 32 axes for 1 GOT multi drop communication RS 422 connecti...

Page 573: ...le 1 Cable length The length of the cable RS 232 must be 15m or less 2 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 1 4 1 GOT connector specifications RS 232 connection diagram 1 RS 232 connection diagram 2 RS 232 connection diagram 3 Connector for interface unit s or servo amplifier s CN3 1 3 9 2 5 7 8 6 4 GOT side Plate 2 1 12 11 CD NC 1 SD TXD RD RXD SG RS RTS CS CTS DR ...

Page 574: ...te 9 19 5 15 11 1 10 Plate Connector for interface unit s or 1st axis servo amplifier s CN3 Connector for interface unit s or 32nd axis last axis 1 servo amplifier s CN3 SDP SDN RDP RDN LG LG TRE SD 9 19 5 15 11 1 10 Plate RS 422 connection diagram 2 GOT side SDP SDN RDP RDN LG LG TRE SD Connector for interface unit s or 2nd axis servo amplifier s CN3 SDP SDN RDP RDN LG LG TRE SD RXD RDA RXD RDB T...

Page 575: ...short as possible 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 GOT side Modular connector Servo amplifier side Distributor side 3 5 2 7 1 6 4 8 SDA RDA RSA CSA SG SDB RDB RSB CSB FG RDP SDP P5D LG LG RDN SDN NC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Distributor side Modular connector Distributor side Modular connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 LG P5D RDP SDN SDP RDN LG NC LG P5D RDP SDN SDP RDN LG NC 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Distributor side Modular connector Ser...

Page 576: ...t s or 32nd axis last axis servo amplifier s CN3 SDP SDN RDP RDN LG LG TRE SDP SDN RDP RDN LG LG TRE RXD RDA RXD RDB TXD SDA TXD SDB SG GND RTS RSA RTS RSB CTS CSA CTS CSB 9 19 5 15 11 1 10 Plate 9 19 5 15 11 1 10 Plate SDP SDN RDP RDN LG LG TRE 9 19 5 15 11 1 10 Plate 1 RS 422 connection diagram 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 GOT side Modular connector Servo amplifier side Distributor side 3 6 5 4 1 7 2 8 T...

Page 577: ... CTS SDA2 TXD2 SDB2 TXD2 RDA2 RXD2 RDB2 RXD2 NC 3 4 1 2 13 9 10 11 12 5 6 7 8 14 Shell 13 14 39 40 3 28 30 34 31 Plate 13 14 39 40 3 28 30 34 31 Plate 13 14 39 40 3 28 30 34 31 Plate Connector for interface unit s or 1st axis servo amplifier s CN1 Connector for interface unit s or 32nd axis last axis 1 servo amplifier s CN1 SDP SDN RDP RDN LG LG TRE SD RS 422 connection diagram 10 GOT side SDP SDN...

Page 578: ...he terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to No b For GT14 GT11 GT10 Set the terminating resistor selector to 330 For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT RS 422 connection diagram 11 GOT side Connector for interface unit s or 1st axis servo amplifier s CN1 Connector for interface unit s or 2nd axis servo amplifie...

Page 579: ...INT 1 Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication Settings after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual GT User s Manual 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 2 3 4 Cl...

Page 580: ...oller By setting GOT internal device GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller For example faulty station that has communication timeout can be cut from the system For details of the setting contents of GOT internal device refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual Fundamentals ...

Page 581: ...value enter 000E to basic parameter No 19 POINT POINT POINT 1 Parameter setting Set the parameter at the pushbutton switch provided on the operation section of the servo amplifier or setup software 2 When changing the parameter Turn off then on the servo amplifier to be effective the new parameter Model name Refer to MELSERVO J2 Super Series 16 5 1 MELSERVO J2M Series 16 5 2 MELSERVO J4 J3 Series ...

Page 582: ... baud rate selection 1 0 9600bps 1 19200bps 2 38400bps 3 57600bps 2 Serial communication I F selection 0 RS 232 1 RS 422 3 Communication response delay time selection 0 Invalid 1 Valid Response after 800 s or longer delay Basic IFU parameter No 10 Interface unit serial communication station No selection 0 to 31 Default 0 2 Basic IFU parameter No 11 Slot 1 serial communication station No selection ...

Page 583: ...rs are not consecutive 1 Direct specification When setting the device specify the station number of the servo amplifier of which data is to be changed 2 Indirect specification When setting the device indirectly specify the station number of the inverter of which data is to be changed using the 16 bit GOT internal data register GD10 to GD25 When specifying the station No from 100 to 115 on GT Desig...

Page 584: ...d name for the servo amplifier is displayed 5 Select a device to be set 6 Clicking the OK button reflects the device selected by step 4 to the Device dialog box POINT POINT POINT When selecting All in the Network setting The network No 0 and Station No FF are displayed on Device List and when printing Device List screen Item Description Device Set the device name device number and bit number The b...

Page 585: ...valid in the servo amplifier side when the written data is outside the range of values which can be set by the servo amplifier 3 Memory area for writing parameters Parameters are written to RAM or E2 PROM of servo amplifier a When written to RAM Remember that written parameters are cleared when power supply to the servo amplifier is turned off b When written to E2PROM Written parameters are not cl...

Page 586: ...o selection DSN8 PRM19 PRM1019 Parameter write inhibit BLK PRM20 PRM1020 Serial communication time out selection SIC PRM21 to PRM29 PRM1021 to PRM1029 For manufacturer setting Device name Item Symbol ST0 Regenerative load ratio ST1 Bus voltage ST2 Peak bus voltage Device name Item Symbol AL0 Current alarm number AL11 Servo status when alarm occurs regenerative load factor AL12 Servo status when al...

Page 587: ...parameter Expansion parameter PRM 1 PRM0 to PRM84 PRM1000 to PRM1084 Status display ST ST0 to ST10 Alarm AL AL0 AL11 to AL21 AL200 to AL205 AL210 to AL215 AL230 to AL235 Double word device Input signal for test operation for test operation TMI TMI0 Forced output of signal pin for test operation TMO TMO0 Set data for test operation TMD TMD0 to TMD2 Device name Item Symbol SP0 Status display data cl...

Page 588: ...anufacturer setting PRM69 PRM1069 Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 2 CMX2 PRM70 PRM1070 Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 3 CMX3 PRM71 PRM1071 Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 4 CMX4 PRM72 to PRM75 PRM1072 to PRM1075 For manufacturer setting PRM76 PRM1076 Internal torque limit 2 TL2 PRM77 to PRM84 PRM1077 to PRM1084 For manufacturer setting Device name Item Symbol ST0 ...

Page 589: ...t switch AL215 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fifth alarm in past AL230 Detailed alarm from alarm history most recent alarm AL231 Detailed alarm from alarm history first alarm in past AL232 Detailed alarm from alarm history second alarm in past AL233 Detailed alarm from alarm history third alarm in past AL234 Detailed alarm from alarm history fourth alarm in past AL235 Detailed alarm from ...

Page 590: ...rd gain FFC PRM24 PRM1024 Zero speed ZSP PRM25 PRM1025 Analog speed command maximum speed limit maximum speed VCM PRM26 PRM1026 Analog torque command maximum output TLC PRM27 PRM1027 Encoder output pulses ENR PRM28 PRM1028 Internal torque limit 1 TL1 PRM29 PRM1029 Analog speed command offset limit offset VCO PRM30 PRM1030 Analog torque command offset limit offset TLO PRM31 PRM1031 Analog monitor 1...

Page 591: ... command pulse frequency AL16 Servo status when alarm occurs analog speed command voltage limit voltage AL17 Servo status when alarm occurs analog torque command voltage limit voltage AL18 Servo status when alarm occurs regenerative load ratio AL19 Servo status when alarm occurs effective load ratio AL20 Servo status when alarm occurs peak load ratio AL21 Servo status when alarm occurs instantaneo...

Page 592: ... SP0 to SP6 Decimal Operation mode selection OM OM0 to OM4 Instruction demand for test operation TMB TMB0 to TMB1 Word device Basic parameter expansion parameter PRM 1 PRM0 to PRM90 PRM1000 to PRM1090 Status display ST ST0 to ST16 Alarm AL AL0 to AL1 AL11 to AL27 AL200 to AL205 AL210 to AL215 AL230 to AL235 External input DI 4 DI0 to DI2 External output DO DO0 to DO1 Point table position POS 2 POS...

Page 593: ...PRM33 PRM1033 Electromagnetic brake sequence output MBR PRM34 PRM1034 Ration of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment GD2 PRM35 PRM1035 Position control gain 2 PG2 PRM36 PRM1036 Speed control gain 1 VG1 PRM37 PRM1037 Position control gain 2 VG2 PRM38 PRM1038 Speed integral compensation VIC PRM39 PRM1039 Speed differential compensation VDC PRM40 to PRM41 PRM1040 to PRM1041 For manufactu...

Page 594: ...05 Alarm number from alarm history fifth alarm in past AL210 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history most recent alarm AL211 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history first alarm in past AL212 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history second alarm in past AL213 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history third alarm in past AL214 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history fourth alarm in past AL215 Alarm occurren...

Page 595: ...ed with the GOT a Servo amplifier request b Operation mode selection c Instruction demand for test operation Device name 2 Setting range Device No represent ation Bit device Servo amplifier request SP SP0 to SP6 Decimal Operation mode selection OM OM0 to OM4 Instruction demand for test operation TMB TMB0 to TMB1 Word device Basic parameter expansion parameter PRM 1 PRM0 to PRM90 PRM1000 to PRM1090...

Page 596: ... PRM40 PRM1040 JOG operation acceleration deceleration time constant JTC PRM41 PRM1041 Home position return operation acceleration deceleration time constant ZTS PRM42 PRM1042 Home position return position data ZPS PRM43 PRM1043 Moving distance after proximity dog DCT PRM44 PRM1044 Stopper type home position return stopper time ZTM PRM45 PRM1045 Stopper type home position return torque limit value...

Page 597: ... in past AL202 Alarm number from Alarm History second alarm in past AL203 Alarm number from Alarm History third alarm in past AL204 Alarm number from Alarm History fourth alarm in past AL205 Alarm number from Alarm History fifth alarm in past AL210 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history most recent alarm AL211 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history first alarm in past AL212 Alarm occurrence time i...

Page 598: ...PD1 to PD30 PD1001 to PD1030 Status display ST 3 ST0 to ST14 Alarm AL 3 AL0 to AL1 AL11 to AL25 AL200 to AL205 AL210 to AL215 AL230 to AL235 External input DI 4 DI0 to DI2 External output DO 3 DO0 to DO1 Double word device Input signal for test operation for test operation TMI TMI0 Forced output of signal pin for test operation TMO TMO0 Set data for test operation TMD TMD0 to TMD1 TMD3 Device name...

Page 599: ...oad inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment at changing gain GD2B PB30 PB1030 Position loop gain at changing gain PG2B PB31 PB1031 Speed loop gain at changing gain VG2B PB32 PB1032 Speed integral compensation at changing gain VICB PB33 PB1033 Vibration suppression control vibration frequency setting for changing gain VRF1B PB34 PB1034 Vibration suppression control vibration resonance setting ...

Page 600: ...Load inertia moment ratio ST14 Bus voltage Device name Item Symbol AL0 Current alarm number AL1 Detailed data of current alarms AL11 Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative feedback pulses AL12 Servo status when alarm occurs servo monitor speed AL13 Servo status when alarm occurs droop pulses AL14 Servo status when alarm occurs cumulative command pulses AL15 Servo status when alarm occurs comman...

Page 601: ... Device No represen tation Bit device Servo amplifier request SP SP0 to SP6 Decimal Operation mode selection OM OM0 to OM5 Instruction demand for test operation TMB TMB1 to TMB6 Word device Basic setting parameter PA 1 PA1 to PA19 PA1001 to PA1019 Decimal Gain filter parameter PB 1 PB1 to PB45 PB1001 to PB1045 Extension setting parameter PC 1 PC1 to PC50 PC1001 to PC1050 I O setting parameter PD 1...

Page 602: ...eter 1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the parameter data Device name Item Symbol SP0 Status display data clear SP1 Current alarm clear SP2 Alarm history clear SP3 External input signal prohibited SP4 External output signal prohibited SP5 External input signal resumed SP6 External output signal resumed...

Page 603: ... Gain changing Vibration suppression control vibration frequency setting VRF1B PB34 PB1034 Gain changing Vibration suppression control resonance frequency setting VRF2B PB35 to PB45 PB1035 to PB1045 For manufacturer setting Device name Item Symbol 1 PC1 PC1001 For manufacturer setting PC2 PC1002 Home position return type ZTY PC3 PC1003 Direction of home position return ZDIR PC4 PC1004 Home positio...

Page 604: ... VCO PO22 PO1022 MR J3 D01 Analog torque limitation offset TLO PO23 to 35 PO1023 to PO1035 For manufacturer setting Device name Item Symbol 1 Device name Item Symbol ST0 Current position ST1 Command position ST2 Command remaining distance ST3 Point table No ST4 Cumulative feedback pulses ST5 Servo monitor speed ST6 Droop pulses ST7 Override voltage ST8 Override ST9 Analog torque command voltage li...

Page 605: ...alarm in past Device name Item Symbol DI0 Input device statuses 1 DI1 Input device statuses 2 DI2 Input device statuses 3 DI3 External input pin statuses 1 DI4 External input pin statuses 2 DI5 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication 1 DI6 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication 2 DI7 Statuses of input devices switched on through communication 3 Device name ...

Page 606: ...o PA32 PA1001 to PA1032 Gain filter parameter PB 1 PB1 to PB64 PB1001 to PB1064 Extension setting parameter PC 1 PC1 to PC80 PC1001 to PC1080 I O setting parameter PD 1 PD1 to PD48 PD1001 to PD1048 Extension setting 2 parameter PE 1 PE1 to PE64 PE1001 to PE1064 Extension setting 3 parameter PF 1 PF1 to PF48 PF1001 to PF1048 Linear servo motor DD motor setting parameter PL 2 PL1 to PL48 PL1001 to P...

Page 607: ... Overshoot permissible level OTHOV PA26 PA1026 2 Function selection A 5 AOP5 PA27 to 32 PA1027 to 1032 For manufacturer setting Device name Item Symbol 1 PB1 PB1001 Adaptive tuning mode adaptive filter II PB1 PB2 PB1002 Vibration suppression control tuning mode advanced vibration suppression control II VRFT PB3 PB1003 Position command acceleration deceleration time constant position smoothing PST ...

Page 608: ...it 6 PC11 PC1011 Internal speed command 7 SC7 Internal speed limit 7 PC12 PC1012 Analog speed command Maximum speed VCM Analog speed limit Maximum speed PC13 PC1013 Analog torque command maximum output TLC PC14 PC1014 Analog monitor 1 output MOD1 PC15 PC1015 Analog monitor 2 output MOD2 PC16 PC1016 Electromagnetic brake sequence output MBR PC17 PC1017 Zero speed ZSP PC18 PC1018 Alarm history clear...

Page 609: ...ilter setting DIF PD30 PD1030 Function selection D 1 DOP1 PD31 PD1031 For manufacturer setting PD32 PD1032 Function selection D 3 DOP3 PD33 PD1033 For manufacturer setting PD34 PD1034 Function selection D 5 DOP5 PD35 to 48 PD1035 to 1048 For manufacturer setting Device name Item Symbol PE1 to 40 PE1000 to 1040 For manufacturer setting PE41 PE1041 Function selection E 3 EOP3 PE42 to 64 PE1042 to 10...

Page 610: ...rst alarm in past AL202 Alarm number from Alarm History second alarm in past AL203 Alarm number from Alarm History third alarm in past AL204 Alarm number from Alarm History fourth alarm in past AL205 Alarm number from Alarm History fifth alarm in past Device name Item Symbol AL210 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history most recent alarm AL211 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history first alarm in p...

Page 611: ...h alarm in past ALM226 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 6th alarm in past ALM227 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 7th alarm in past ALM228 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 8th alarm in past ALM229 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 9th alarm in past ALM230 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 10th alarm in past ALM231 Alarm occurrence time in alarm history 11th alarm in pas...

Page 612: ...ting parameter PA 2 PA1 to PA32 PA1001 to PA1032 Decimal Gain filter parameter PB 2 PB1 to PB64 PB1001 to PB1064 Extension setting parameter PC 2 PC1 to PC80 PC1001 to PC1080 I O setting parameter PD 2 PD1 to PD48 PD1001 to PD1048 Extension setting No 2 parameter PE 2 PE1 to PE64 PE1001 to PE1064 Extension setting No 3 parameter PF 2 PF1 to PF48 PF1001 to PF1048 Option unit parameter PO 2 PO1 to P...

Page 613: ...lifier used with the GOT a Servo amplifier request b Operation mode selection c Instruction demand for test operation d One touch tuning e Basic setting parameter Double word device Current position latch data LD 4 LD0 to LD1 Decimal The value of the general purpose register Rx RR 8 RR1 to RR4 RR1001 to RR1004 The value of the general purpose register Dx RD RD1 to RD4 Lifetime diagnosis ALD 3 ALD0...

Page 614: ...1013 Machine resonance suppression filter 1 NH1 PB14 PB1014 Notch form selection 1 NHQ1 Device name Item Symbol 1 PB15 PB1015 Machine resonance suppression filter 2 NH2 PB16 PB1016 Notch form selection 2 NHQ2 PB17 PB1017 Shaft resonance suppression filter NHF PB18 PB1018 Low pass filter setting LPF PB19 PB1019 Vibration suppression control 1 Vibration frequency VRF11 PB20 PB1020 Vibration suppress...

Page 615: ...1021 RS 422 communication function selection SOP PC22 PC1022 Function selection C 1 COP1 PC23 PC1023 Function selection C 2 COP2 PC24 PC1024 Function selection C 3 COP3 PC25 PC1025 For manufacturer setting PC26 PC1026 Function selection C 5 COP5 PC27 PC1027 Function selection C 6 COP6 PC28 PC1028 Function selection C 7 COP7 PC29 PC1029 For manufacturer setting PC30 PC1030 Home position return acce...

Page 616: ...control Feedback pulse electronic gear 1 Numerator FBN PE5 PE1005 Fully closed loop control Feedback pulse electronic gear 1 Denominator FBD PE6 PE1006 Fully closed loop control Speed deviation error detection level BC1 PE7 PE1007 Fully closed loop control Position deviation error detection level BC2 PE8 PE1008 Fully closed loop dual feedback filter DUF PE9 PE1009 For manufacturer setting PE10 PE1...

Page 617: ...mode selection CTY PT2 PT1002 Function selection T 1 TOP1 PT3 PT1003 Feeding function selection FTY PT4 PT1004 Home position return type ZTY PT5 PT1005 Home position return speed ZRF PT6 PT1006 Creep speed CRF PT7 PT1007 Home position shift distance ZST PT8 PT1008 Home position return position data ZPS PT9 PT1009 Moving distance after proximity dog DCT PT10 PT1010 Stopper type home position return...

Page 618: ...Servo status when alarm occurs instantaneous torque Device name Item Symbol AL22 Servo status alarm Within one revolution position 1 pulse unit AL23 Servo status when alarm occurs ABS counter AL24 Servo status alarm load inertia moment ratio AL25 Servo status when alarm occurs bus voltage AL200 Alarm number from Alarm History most recent alarm AL201 Alarm number from Alarm History first alarm in p...

Page 619: ...No ALM58 Servo status alarm Analog override voltage ALM59 Servo status alarm Override level ALM200 Alarm number from Alarm History most recent alarm ALM201 Alarm number from Alarm History 1st alarm in past ALM202 Alarm number from Alarm History 2nd alarm in past ALM203 Alarm number from Alarm History 3rd alarm in past Device name Item Symbol ALM204 Alarm number from Alarm History 4th alarm in past...

Page 620: ...M code No 1 to No 255 Device name Item Symbol MD0 Machine diagnosis data parameter number MD1 Machine diagnosis data shift judgment test mode MD2 Machine diagnosis data status MD3 Machine diagnosis data coulomb friction torque in positive direction MD4 Machine diagnosis data friction torque at rated speed in positive direction MD5 Machine diagnosis data coulomb friction torque in negative directio...

Page 621: ...data for test operation Device name Item Symbol RD1 The value of the general purpose register D1 RD2 The value of the general purpose register D2 RD3 The value of the general purpose register D3 RD4 The value of the general purpose register D4 Device name Item Symbol ALD0 Cumulative energization time ALD1 Number of ON OFF times for rush relay Device name Item Symbol TMI0 Input signal for test oper...

Page 622: ... the servo amplifier does not have a clock function the settings of Adjust or Broadcast by GOT clock control will be disabled Servo amplifier test operation using the GOT During the servo amplifier test operation when the communication between the GOT and the servo amplifier is interrupted for 0 5 ms or more the servo amplifier decelerates stops and then gets into the servo lock status During the ...

Page 623: ... DROP CONNECTION 21 MULTIPLE GT14 GT12 GT11 GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 22 MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 17 1 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17 1 Connectable Model List 17 2 17 2 System Configuration 17 2 17 3 GOT Side Settings 17 3 17 4 PLC Side Settings 17 6 17 5 Device Range that Can Be Set 17 8 17 6 Precautions 17 8 ...

Page 624: ...l Hardware 4 A length between a hub and a node The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used 10BASE T Max 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logica...

Page 625: ...vironment GT16 GT14 2 3 4 Click Item Description Range GOT NET No Set the network No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 239 GOT PLC No 2 Set the station No of the GOT Default 1 1 to 64 GOT IP Address 1 Set the IP address of the GOT Default 192 168 3 18 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Subnet Mask 1 Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connection via router If the sub network is not used the default v...

Page 626: ...ue is set Default 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Default Gateway Set the router address of the default gateway where the GOT is connected Only for connection via router Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Ethernet Download Port No Set the GOT port No for Ethernet download Default 5014 1024 to 5010 to 5014 to 65534 Except for 5011 5012 5013 and 49153 GOT Communication Port No Set t...

Page 627: ...7 4 PLC Side Settings 2 Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication Settings after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual GT User s Manual 3 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is ...

Page 628: ...ecessity at GOT connection NETIP 192 168 0 19 GOTPORT 5001 GOT The settings other than the following are set to the default 2 Network No 1 PLC No 1 IP address 192 168 0 18 Port No 5001 Communication format UDP fixed Network No 1 PLC No 2 IP address 192 168 0 19 Port No 5001 Communication format UDP fixed CRnD 700 The settings other than the following are set to the default Parameter settings for C...

Page 629: ... following 17 3 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Confirming communication state of CRnD 700 1 When using the Command Prompt of Windows Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows a When normal communication C Ping 192 168 0 19 Reply from 192 168 0 19 bytes 32 time 1ms TTL 64 b When abnormal communication C Ping 192 168 0 19 Request timed out 2 When abnormal comm...

Page 630: ... 255 are used by the system The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with the above numbers Consult with the administrator of the network before setting an IP address to the GOT and controller When connecting to the multiple network equipment including GOT in a segment By increasing the network load the transmission speed between the GOT and PLC may be reduced The following actions may imp...

Page 631: ...ECTION 21 MULTIPLE GT14 GT12 GT11 GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 22 MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 18 1 18 CNC CONNECTION 18 1 Connectable Model List 18 2 18 2 System Configuration 18 3 18 3 Connection Diagram 18 7 18 4 GOT Side Settings 18 8 18 5 CNC Side Settings 18 16 18 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 18 23 18 7 Precautions 18 23 ...

Page 632: ...or later 2 Includes the case on the MELSECNET H network system in the NET 10 mode The GOT cannot be connected to the remote I O network For the connection to CNC C70 refer to Mitsubishi Electric Products Chapter 5 to Chapter 13 Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELDAS C6 C64 1 FCA C6 FCA C64 RS 232 RS 422 18 2 1 MELSECNET 10 2 18 2 2 CC Link ID 18 2 3 Ethernet 18 2 4 ...

Page 633: ...erring the following MELDAS C6 C64 CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL BNP B2255 F311 Cable Production Drawing 4 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 AJ71C24 MELDAS C6 Communication driver F311 cable GOT Connection cable MELDAS C6 C64 CNC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment Model name F311 cable Communication type Cable model Max...

Page 634: ...C6 C64 C64T CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL BNP B2255 C6 C64 C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP B2373 2 Specify the MELSECNET 10 Mode as the Communication Settings For the setting refer to the following 18 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 3 For the coaxial cable and optical fiber cable refer to the following manuals C6 C64 C64T CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL BNP B22...

Page 635: ...373 2 Specify Ver 1 as the mode setting in the Communication Settings to use it For details of the settings refer to the following the manual 18 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 3 For the specifications and inquiries of the CC Link dedicated cable refer to the following CC Link Partner Association s home page http www cc link org CC Link Ver2 ID Communication driver When ...

Page 636: ...odes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 4 For the system configuration of the expansion unit refer to the following manuals C6 C64 C64T CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL BN...

Page 637: ... 18 3 1 RS 232 cable Connection diagram 1 For details of the MELDAS C6 C64 side connection refer to the following manuals MELDAS C6 C64 CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL BNP B2255 MELDAS C6 C64 NETWORK MANUAL BNP B2373 Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less 2 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 1 4 1 GOT...

Page 638: ...POINT POINT The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 1 1 2 I F communication setting 18 4 2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment 1 AJ71QC24 MELDAS C6 2 3 4 Click Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication w...

Page 639: ...ve station 1 Self loopback test 1 Internal self loopback test 1 H W test 1 Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs When receiving no response after retries the communication times out Default 3times 0 to 5times Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out Default 3sec 3 to 90sec Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of t...

Page 640: ...Input for Error Station Set Clear Hold at an error occurrence Default Clear Clear Hold Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs When no response is received after retries a communication times out Default 3times 0 to 5times Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out Default 3sec 3 to 90sec Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing t...

Page 641: ...on via router If the sub network is not used the default value is set Default 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Default Gateway 1 Set the router address of the default gateway where the GOT is connected Only for connection via router Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Ethernet Download Port No 1 Set the GOT port No for Ethernet download Default 5014 1024 to 5010 5014 to 65534 Except...

Page 642: ... for connection via router If the sub network is not used the default value is set Default 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Default Gateway Set the router address of the default gateway where the GOT is connected Only for connection via router Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Ethernet Download Port No Set the GOT port No for Ethernet download Default 5014 1024 to 5010 to 5014 to ...

Page 643: ...sterisk N W No Set the network No of the connected Ethernet module Default blank Network No of CNC 1 PLC No 2 Set the station No of the connected Ethernet module Default blank Station No of CNC Type Set the type of the connected Ethernet module Default QJ71E71 AJ71QE71 IP Address Set the IP address of the connected Ethernet module Default blank IP address of CNC Port No Set the port No of the conn...

Page 644: ...h and LED refer to the following manual GT15 CC Link communication unit User s Manual 1 Mode setting switch 2 Station number setting switch Station number setting switch Description Set value Set the station No of the MELSECNET 10 communication unit Set to not duplicate other stations in the network Default 01 1 to 64 GT15 75J71LP23 Z 1 to 32 GT15 75J71BR13 Z Mode setting switch Description Set va...

Page 645: ...example refer to the following 18 5 2 CC Link ID connection 2 When the switch setting is changed When changing the switch setting after mounting the GT15 75J61BT13 Z type CC Link communication unit to the GOT reset the GOT Transmission baudrate setting switch Description Set value Specify the transmission speed Default 0 0 156kbps 1 625kbps 2 2 5Mbps 3 5Mbps 4 10Mbps Condition setting switches Set...

Page 646: ...mmon parameters set the network parameters by peripheral device and write them on CNC An example of parameter setting by GPPW is as follows Set the first I O No as follows according to the expansion slot to which the unit is inserted a Start I O No b Example of GX Developer setting For details of the parameter setting refer to the following C6 C64 C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP B2373 2 Normal...

Page 647: ...ation condition SW Description OFF ON 1 Network type 1 Inter PC net PC Remote I O net 2 Station type 4 Normal station N ST Control station MNG 3 Used parameter 2 Common parameters PRM Default parameter D PRM 4 Number of stations 2 Valid when SW3 is ON OFF 8 Station ON 16 Station OFF 32 Station ON 64 Station 5 OFF OFF ON ON 6 B W total points 2 Valid when SW3 is ON OFF 2K points ON 4K points OFF 6K...

Page 648: ...ed parameter 2 Common parameters PRM Default parameter D PRM 4 Number of stations 2 Valid when SW3 is ON OFF 8 Sta tio n ON 16 Sta tio n OFF 32 Sta tio n ON 64 Sta tio n 5 OFF OFF ON ON 6 B W total points 2 Valid when SW3 is ON OFF 2K poi nts ON 4K poi nts OFF 6K poi nts ON 8K poi nts 7 OFF OFF ON ON 8 Not used Always OFF 2 Station number setting switch Station number setting 2 3 Setting range 01 ...

Page 649: ... the local stations it is not necessary to set the network parameters 1 Master station parameter It is necessary to set and write the network parameters to CNC with GX Developer The following shows an example of parameter settings Set the first I O No as follows according to the expansion slot to which the unit is inserted a Start I O No b Example of GX Developer setting For details of the paramet...

Page 650: ...Sta tio n Invalid valid SW5 OFF ON ON OFF SW7 Not used Always OFF SW8 Not used Always OFF 2 Mode setting switch This switch sets the unit operation status No Name Description Settability Master station Local station 0 Online 1 Automatic online return provided when data link is enabled Yes Yes 1 Link with remote I O net mode Yes No 2 Offline 1 Data link offline state Yes Yes 3 Line test 1 1 Line te...

Page 651: ...al computer 1 Network parameter setting Set the network parameters by peripheral device and write them on CNC An example of parameter setting by GPPW is as follows Set the first I O No as follows according to the expansion slot to which the unit is inserted a Unit No Ethernet 192 168 1 xx CNC 1 Communication with GOT N W No 239 PLC No 2 IP address 192 168 1 2 CNC 2 N W No 239 PLC No 3 IP address 1...

Page 652: ...et the IP address by the 7 segment LED and rotary switch of the CNC side referring to the next page 2 CNC side parameter setting Confirm the CNC side parameter setting with the settings of IP address gateway address subnet mask and port No by the 7 segment LED and rotary switch of the CNC side For details of the parameter setting operation refer to the following C6 C64 C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MAN...

Page 653: ... error occurs with the CNC connection MELSECNET 10 connection the system alarm is kept displaying on the GOT even though the error factor is removed To cancel the system alarm display restart the GOT Version of CNC For MELDAS C6 C64 use NC system software version E0 or later 18 7 3 CC Link ID connection Using cyclic transmission 1 I O signal for master station Do not turn on the reserved output si...

Page 654: ...d between the GOT and CNC may be reduced The following actions may improve the communication performance Using a switching hub More high speed by 100BASE TX 100Mbps Reduction of the monitoring points on GOT Ethernet cable connection Ethernet cable is so susceptible to noise that you should wire power cables and electric supply cables separately And you need to attach a ferrite core attachment on t...

Page 655: ...NCTION 22 MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 19 1 19 ENERGY MEASURING UNIT ELECTRIC MULTI MEASURING INSTRUMENT CONNECTION 19 1 Connectable Model List 19 2 19 2 System Configuration 19 3 19 3 Connection Diagram 19 4 19 4 GOT Side Settings 19 9 19 5 Setting of Energy Measuring Unit Electric Multi measuring Instrument 19 10 19 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 19 11 19 7 Precautions 19 12...

Page 656: ...owing GOT models are compatible with the RS 422 485 connection For the confirming method of hardware version refer to the following GT16 User s Manual GT15 User s Manual GT14 User s Manual GT11 User s Manual GT10 User s Manual Manufacturer Series Model name 1 Clock Communication type Refer to Mitsubishi Electric Energy measuring unit EMU4 BD1 MB RS 485 19 2 1 EMU4 HD1 MB Electric multi measuring i...

Page 657: ...t to the RS 232 interface built into GOT MODBUS RTU Communication driver GOT Connection cable ENERGY MEASURING UNIT ELECTRIC MULTI MEASURING INSTRUMENT Controller Communication type Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment Cable model Connection diagram number Max distance Option device Model Energy measuring unit Electric multi measuring instrument RS 422 485 RS 422 485 connection dia...

Page 658: ...al set the terminating resistor of the GOT to Enable When placing the GOT to the position other than the terminal set the terminating resistor of the GOT to Disable 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 4 Ground a shield correctly Series name Signal name 1 Signal name 2 Energy measuring unit RS485 RS485 Electric multi measuring instrument T R T R Series name Signal name Signal name Energy measuring u...

Page 659: ...y the short circuit of the following terminals a terminating resistor with 120 is connected 3 When placing the GOT to the terminal set the terminating resistor of the GOT to 110 When placing the GOT to the position other than the terminal set the terminating resistor of the GOT to OPEN 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 4 Ground a shield correctly Series name Signal name 1 Signal name 2 Energy mea...

Page 660: ...a terminal By the short circuit of the following terminals a terminating resistor with 120 is connected 3 When placing the GOT to the terminal in the system configuration set the terminating resistor to 110 When placing the GOT to the position other than the terminal set the terminating resistor of the GOT to OPEN 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 4 Ground a shield correctly Series name Signal na...

Page 661: ... is connected 3 Set the 2 wire 4 wire terminating resistor setting switch of the RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor as follows 2 wire type 4 wire type 2 wire type 1Pair When placing the GOT to the terminal Set the terminating resistor of the GOT to 110 When placing the GOT to the position other than the terminal Set the terminating resistor of the GOT to OPEN 1 4 4 Setting the RS 232 485 signal ...

Page 662: ...d to the GOT a For GT16 body RS 422 485 communication unit Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch b For GT14 GT11 GT10 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor selector For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 2 Energy measuring unit electric multi measuring instrument side Whe...

Page 663: ...s 2 Set 8bit 3 Set HL Order 4 Make the settings to match the setting of the energy measuring unit electronic multi measuring instrument POINT POINT POINT 1 Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual U...

Page 664: ...with GOT settings 19 5 2 Station number setting In the MODBUS network a maximum of 31 energy measuring units electronic multi measuring instruments can be connected to 1 GOT Assign a non overlapped station number ranging from 1 to 247 arbitrarily to each energy measuring unit electronic multi measuring instrument In the system configuration the energy measuring unit electric multi measuring instru...

Page 665: ...031AH is displayed as 400795 on GT Designer3 GS device settings Set the GS device as follows GS573 1 2 1 The GS device specifies the maximum number of the holding register read times To input the numerical values to the GS device automatically at GOT startup use the status observation function or the script function Setting example of the status observation function For details of the status obser...

Page 666: ...er to the following 19 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings GOT clock control The settings of time adjusting or time broadcast made on the GOT will be disabled on the PLC Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the controller By setting GOT internal device GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller For example the faulty station where a communicati...

Page 667: ...MULTIPLE GOT CONNECTIONS 20 GOT MULTI DROP CONNECTION 20 1 21 MULTIPLE GT14 GT12 GT11 GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION CONNECTION 21 1 ...

Page 668: ......

Page 669: ...CTION FUNCTION 22 MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 20 1 20 GOT MULTI DROP CONNECTION 20 1 CPU that can be Monitored 20 2 20 2 Connectable Model List 20 3 20 3 System Configuration 20 16 20 4 Connection Diagram 20 17 20 5 GOT Side Settings 20 25 20 6 Setting of Serial Multi Drop Connection Unit 20 26 20 7 Setting of connection conversion adapter 20 31 20 8 Precautions 20 32 ...

Page 670: ...ECTION 20 1 CPU that can be Monitored 20 GOT MULTI DROP CONNECTION 20 1 CPU that can be Monitored The GOT can monitor only a CPU to which a serial multi drop connection unit GT01 RS4 M is connected directly Serial Multi Drop Unit ...

Page 671: ...nafter referred to as master module directly The following table shows the connectable models Continued to next page Series Model name Clock Communication type Between CPU and master module Between master module and GOT MELSEC iQ R Series R04CPU RS 232 RS 422 RS 485 R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU R04ENCPU R08ENCPU R16ENCPU R32ENCPU R120ENCPU R08SFCPU R16SFCPU R32SFCP...

Page 672: ...e 4 Q00JCPU RS 232 RS 422 RS 485 Q00CPU 1 Q01CPU 1 Q02CPU 1 Q02HCPU 1 Q06HCPU 1 Q12HCPU 1 Q25HCPU 1 Q02PHCPU RS 232 RS 422 Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Main base Q25PRHCPU Main base Q12PRHCPU Extension base Q25PRHCPU Extension base Q00UJCPU RS 232 RS 422 Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q03UDECPU RS 232 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Q04UDEHCPU Q0...

Page 673: ...required When using L6ADP R4 use an LCPU whose upper five digits are 15102 or later Series Model name Clock Communication type Between CPU and master module Between master module and GOT MELSEC L 3 L02CPU 5 L06CPU 5 L26CPU 5 L26CPU BT 5 L02CPU P 5 L06CPU P 5 L26CPU P 5 L26CPU PBT 5 L02SCPU L02SCPU P RS 232 RS 422 RS 485 MELSEC Q A mode 3 Q02CPU A Q02HCPU A Q06HCPU A RS 232 RS 422 MELSEC QnA QnACPU...

Page 674: ...RS 232 in the multiple CPU system 5 SB SW Ww Wr ER and BM devices cannot be monitored Series Model name Clock Communication type Between CPU and master module Between master module and GOT MELSEC A AnSCPU 5 A2USCPU S1 RS 422 RS 485 A2USHCPU S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24 R2 A1SHCPU A2SCPU 1 A2SHCPU A1SJCPU A1SJCPU S3 A1SJHCPU MELSEC A 5 A0J2HCPU 1 RS 422 A0J2HCPUP21 1 A0J2HCPUR21 1 A0J2HCPU DC24 1 A2CCPU 1 R...

Page 675: ...ed Series Model name Clock Communication type Between CPU and master module Between master module and GOT Motion controller CPU A Series 2 A171SHCPU RS 422 RS 485 A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU S1 MELSEC WS WS0 CPU0 RS 232 WS0 CPU1 WS0 CPU3 MELSECNET H remote I O station QJ72LP25 25 RS 232 QJ72LP25G QJ72BR15 CC Link IE Field Network head module LJ72GF15 T2 CC Link IE Field Net...

Page 676: ...QROL A500 A500L RS 485 RS 485 FREQROL F500 F500L FREQROL V500 V500L FREQROL E500 FREQROL S500 S500E FREQROL F500J FREQROL D700 FREQROL F700PJ FREQROL E700 FREQROL A700 FREQROL F700 FREQROL F700P FREQROL A800 FREQROL F800 Sensorless servo FREQROL E700EX MELIPM MD CX522 K A0 MELSERVO MR J2S A RS 232 RS 422 MR J2S CP MR J2S CL MR J2M P8A MR J2M DU MR J3 A MR JE A MR J3 T MR J4 A ...

Page 677: ...nection Unit hereinafter referred to as master module in computer link connection The following table shows the connectable models Continued to next page Series Model name Clock Communication type Between CPU and master module Between master module and GOT MELSEC iQ R Series R04CPU RS 232 RS 422 RS 485 R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU Motion controller CPU MELSEC iQ R ...

Page 678: ...S 232 RS 422 RS 485 Q00CPU 1 Q01CPU 1 Q02CPU 1 Q02HCPU 1 Q06HCPU 1 Q12HCPU 1 Q25HCPU 1 Q02PHCPU RS 232 RS 422 Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Main base Q25PRHCPU Main base Q12PRHCPU Extension base Q25PRHCPU Extension base Q00UJCPU RS 232 RS 422 Q00UCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU Q06UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q03UDECPU RS 232 RS 422 Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU ...

Page 679: ...ween master module and GOT MELSEC L 1 L02CPU RS 232 RS 422 RS 485 L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU BT L02CPU P L06CPU P L26CPU P L26CPU PBT L02SCPU L02SCPU P MELSEC Q A mode 1 Q02CPU A RS 232 RS 422 Q02HCPU A Q06HCPU A MELSEC QnA QnACPU 1 Q2ACPU RS 232 RS 422 Q2ACPU S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU MELSEC QnA QnASCPU 1 Q2ASCPU RS 232 RS 422 Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 MELSEC A AnCPU A2UCPU RS 232 RS 422 A2UCPU S1...

Page 680: ...CPU and master module Between master module and GOT MELSEC A AnSCPU A2USCPU S1 RS 232 RS 422 RS 485 A2USHCPU S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24 R2 A1SHCPU A2SCPU A2SHCPU A1SJCPU A1SJCPU S3 A1SJHCPU MELSEC A A0J2HCPU RS 422 A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU DC24 A2CCPU A2CCPUP21 A2CCPUR21 A2CCPUC24 RS 232 RS 422 A2CCPUC24 PRF A2CJCPU S3 A1FXCPU Motion controller CPU Q Series Q172CPU 1 2 RS 232 RS 422 Q173CPU 1 2 Q...

Page 681: ... function Series Model name Clock Communication type Between CPU and master module Between master module and GOT Motion controller CPU A Series A171SHCPU RS 232 RS 422 RS 485 A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU S1 MELSEC WS WS0 CPU0 WS0 CPU1 WS0 CPU3 MELSECNET H remote I O station QJ72LP25 25 RS 232 RS 422 QJ72LP25G QJ72BR15 CC Link IE Field Network head module LJ72GF15 T2 CC Link ...

Page 682: ...QROL A500 A500L RS 485 RS 485 FREQROL F500 F500L FREQROL V500 V500L FREQROL E500 FREQROL S500 S500E FREQROL F500J FREQROL D700 FREQROL F700PJ FREQROL E700 FREQROL A700 FREQROL F700 FREQROL F700P FREQROL A800 FREQROL F800 Sensorless servo FREQROL E700EX MELIPM MD CX522 K A0 MELSERVO MR J2S A RS 232 RS 422 MR J2S CP MR J2S CL MR J2M P8A MR J2M DU MR J3 A MR JE A MR J3 T MR J4 A ...

Page 683: ...nection unit are required For details of the OS installation refer to the following GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual Fundamentals GOT type PLC Serial Multi Drop Connection Unit Connection type Type Serial Multi Drop Connection driver DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION MELSEC QnU DC Q17nD M NC DR CRnD 700 Serial MELSEC MELSEC QnA Q QS MELDAS C6 MELSEC Q MULTI Q MOTION MELSEC...

Page 684: ...e GOT GOT Serial multi drop connection unit PLC Varies according to the connection type Connection cable PLC Serial Multi Drop Connection Unit Connection cable GOT Max distance Number of connectable equipment Model Communication type Cable model Option device Model For details of the system configuration between the Serial Multi Drop Connection Unit and PLC refer to the corresponding section GT01 ...

Page 685: ...tch of the GOT main unit to Disable 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 4 Connect a 330 terminating resistor to the GOT to be a terminal 5 Make sure to ground a cable shield line by applying Class D Grounding 6 For the cable for converting D sub9 pin connector to terminal block refer to the following Precautions when preparing a cable 2 RS485 connection diagram 1 Serial multi drop connection unit T...

Page 686: ...ide 3 20 pin CON side 3 20 pin Serial multi drop connection unit 6 8 10 12 2 1 3 4 5 7 9 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 SDA 1 SDB 1 RDA RDB SG SDA1 TXD1 SDB1 TXD1 RDA1 RXD1 RDB1 RXD1 SG NC NC NC SDA2 TXD2 SDB2 TXD2 RDA2 RXD2 RDB2 RXD2 NC RSA RTS NC RSB RTS NC CSA CTS NC CSB CTS 2 5 5 5 5 5 7 9 11 2 1 3 4 6 8 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 SDA2 TXD2 SDB2 TXD2 RDA2 RXD2 RDB2 RXD2 SG NC NC NC SDA1 TXD1 SD...

Page 687: ...re to ground a cable shield line by applying Class D Grounding RS485 connection diagram 2 For 2 pair wiring CON side 3 20pin CON side 3 20pin CON side 3 20pin Serial multi drop connection unit 6 8 10 12 2 1 3 4 5 7 9 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 RDA 1 RDB 1 SDA 1 SDB 1 SG SDA1 TXD1 SDB1 TXD1 RDA1 RXD1 RDB1 RXD1 SG NC NC NC SDA2 TXD2 SDB2 TXD2 RDA2 RXD2 RDB2 RXD2 NC RSA RTS NC RSB RTS NC CSA CTS NC C...

Page 688: ...a 330 terminating resistor to the GOT to be a terminal 5 Make sure to ground a cable shield line by applying Class D Grounding RS485 connection diagram 3 For 1 pair wiring GOT side 3 GOT side 3 GOT side 3 Serial multi drop connection unit 2 1 2 3 4 9 5 6 7 8 10 SDA 1 SDB 1 RDA RDB SG SDA1 SDB1 RDA1 RDB1 SG SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2 FG 5 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 10 SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2 SG SDA1 SDB1 RDA1 RDB1 FG ...

Page 689: ...minating resistor selector to OPEN 2 Set the terminating resistor selector to 330 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 3 Set the 1pair 2pair signal selection switch to 2pair when using the connection conversion adapter 4 This is the connector pin No of GT14 GT11 GT105 or GT104 main unit 5 Make sure to ground a cable shield line by applying Class D Grounding 100 or less RS485 connection diagram 4 For...

Page 690: ...tches 2 Set the 2 wire 4 wire terminating resistor setting switch of the RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor as follows 2 wire type 4 wire type 4 wire type 2Pair When GOT is a terminal Terminating resistor 330 When GOT is not a terminal Terminating resistor OPEN 1 4 4 Setting the RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor 3 Make sure to ground a cable shield line by applying Class D Grounding 100 or le...

Page 691: ...T Mixed wiring with various GOTs The GOT multi drop connection can be used with various GOTs mixed GT16 FA LTBGTR4CBL GT16 GT15 GT15 RS4 TE GT11 GT10 GT10 9PT5S GT16 GT15 GT15 RS4 9S User created terminal block RDA RDB SDA SDB SG RSA RSB CSA CSB SDA1 SDB1 RDA1 RDB1 SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2 SG RDB1 RDA1 SDB1 SDA1 RDB2 RDA2 SDB2 SDA2 SG FG SDA1 SDB1 RDA1 RDB1 SDA2 SDB2 RDA2 RDB2 SG FG RDB RDA SDB SDA RSA...

Page 692: ...stor must be connected to the GOT a For GT16 GT15 GT12 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to Disable b For GT14 GT11 GT10 Set the terminating resistor selector switch For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT Manufacturer Model Remark MITSUBISHI CABLE INDUSTRIES LTD SPEV SB 0 5 2P Two pair cable of 0 5m...

Page 693: ...on Setting For details refer to the following 1 1 2 I F communication setting 20 5 2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment POINT POINT POINT 1 Communication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication Settings after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utilit...

Page 694: ...Designer3 Version Screen design manual 1 Check mark a communication driver according to the desired connection type and click the Write button 20 6 2 Setting communication interface Communication settings Make the Serial Multi Drop Connection Unit interface setting on Communication with GT01 RS4 M of GT Designer 3 For the communication interface driver set the same communication driver as the seri...

Page 695: ...n 4 Click the Write button when settings are completed 5 If the Communication with GT01 RS4 M dialog box is closed communication setting contents for GT01 RS4 M does not remain To maintain the communication setting contents click export Exporting Importing the communication setting contents To use communication setting contents which are saved previously click import Exporting Importing the commun...

Page 696: ...ta transfer during the steady operation the automatic recovery of the station is executed for one station per ten seconds Therefore the automatic recovery may take maximum 2 minutes and 30 seconds Using this control signal the number of slave stations to be monitored by the master station can be reduced to the actual number of slave stations to be used by a user This makes the automatic recovery p...

Page 697: ...s Make the settings according to the usage environment 3 For the connection with GOT 4 For the connected equipment Set the communication detail settings of the driver for controllers according to the connection type Refer to each chapter Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment Default 115200bps 4...

Page 698: ...es Set the switches according to the connection type POINT POINT POINT Serial Multi Drop Connection Unit For details on the Serial Multi Drop Connection Unit refer to the following manual Serial Multi Drop Connection Unit User s Manual Terminating resistor selector switch PLC communication selection switch ...

Page 699: ... 21 MULTIPLE GT14 GT12 GT11 GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 22 MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 20 7 Setting of connection conversion adapter 20 7 1 Setting switches Set the switches according to the connection type POINT POINT POINT Connection conversion adapter For details on the connection conversion adapter refer to the following manual Connection Conversion Adapter User s manual 1pa...

Page 700: ...he multi channel configuration If a communication timeout error occurs when using the multi drop connection in the multi channel configuration set the send delay time to the serial multi drop connection unit side Communication detail settings Device update cycle When the number of connected slave GOTs and the device points of each GOT increase the device update cycle on the screen may get slower I...

Page 701: ...TI DROP CONNECTION 21 MULTIPLE GT14 GT12 GT11 GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 22 MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 21 1 21 MULTIPLE GT14 GT12 GT11 GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION CONNECTION 21 1 Connectable Model List 21 2 21 2 System Configuration 21 2 21 3 Connection Diagram 21 5 21 4 GOT Side Settings 21 7 21 5 Precautions 21 11 ...

Page 702: ...ction cable PLC GOT 1st 1 Connection cable GOT 2nd 1 Number of connectable equipment Connection type Communication type Option device Model Communication type Cable model Max distance Option device Model For the system configuration between a got and A plc refer to the following DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 4 RS 232 Built into GOT RS 422 RS 422 connection diagram 1 30m Built i...

Page 703: ...32 connection diagram 2 4 When connected to the Computer link the multiple connection function supports only RCPU QCPU Q mode Motion controller CPU Q mode LCPU 5 The 2nd GOT must be a GT10 input power supply 24V RS 422 built in product PLC GOT 1st 1 Connection cable GOT 2nd 1 Number of connectable equipment Connection type Communication type Option device Model Communication type Cable model Max d...

Page 704: ...e GOT 2nd 1 Number of connectable equipment Connection type Communication type Option device Model Communication type Cable model Max distance Option device Model For the system configuration between a got and A plc refer to the following DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 4 RS 422 Built into GOT RS 232 GT01 C30R2 9S 3m or RS 232 connection diagram 1 15m Builtinto GOT 2 GOTs Built i...

Page 705: ...m 2 RS 232 connection diagram 3 GOT side GOT side N C RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 3 2 6 5 4 8 7 N C SD TXD RD RXD DR DSR SG ER DTR CS CTS RS RTS Second GOT side terminal block Brown Red Blue Yellow Green Purple Untied wire color of GT10 C30R2 6P SD RD ER DR SG RS CS NC NC First GOT side Second GOT side terminal block N C RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS...

Page 706: ...ecting a PLC to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT Set the terminating resistor selector of the GOT main unit to 300 For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT RS 422 connection diagram 1 RS 422 connection diagram 2 GOT side SDA RDA RSA CSA SG SDB RDB RSB CSB 2 1 4 3 5 7 6 9 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 GOT side RDA S...

Page 707: ...he list menu 3 Set the following items Manufacturer MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Controller Type Set according to the Controller Type to be connected I F Standard I F RS 232 Driver Set either of the following according to the Controller Type to be connected For GT14 GT12 GT11 Serial MELSEC MELSEC FX For GT10 Serial MELSEC MELSEC A MELSEC FX 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller ...

Page 708: ...T Set the communication interface connecting to the first GOT 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select CH1 from the list menu 3 Set the following items Manufacturer MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Controller Type Set the same setting as the first GOT communication interface connecting to the PLC I F Standard I F RS422 232 Driver Set the same setting ...

Page 709: ...on to time out Default 3sec 3 to 30sec Delay Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT Default 0ms 0 to 300ms Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment Default 115200bps When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected equipment communication ...

Page 710: ...ity the latest setting is effective Item Description Range Transmission Speed Set this item when change the transmission speed used for communication with the connected equipment Default 115200bps When the setting exceeds the limit of the connected equipment communication is performed at the fastest transmission speed supported by the connected equipment 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps 115200bp...

Page 711: ...vices individually Turn on the connected device first and then the first GOT the second GOT and so on Using the FA transparent function When multiple GOTs are connected the FA transparent function is not available even if the RS 232 interface or USB interface is used for the connection When connecting a personal computer to the first GOT the FA transparent function can be used Monitoring stop cond...

Page 712: ...21 12 21 MULTIPLE GT14 GT12 GT11 GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 5 Precautions ...

Page 713: ...MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 1 ...

Page 714: ......

Page 715: ...OT MULTI DROP CONNECTION 21 MULTIPLE GT14 GT12 GT11 GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 22 MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22 1 22 MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 1 What is Multi channel Function 22 2 22 2 System Configuration 22 4 22 3 GOT Side Settings 22 7 22 4 Precautions 22 41 22 5 Multi channel Function Check Sheet 22 42 ...

Page 716: ...on when the multi channel function is used The system configuration between GOT and the controllers is the same as that of when not using the multi channel function For the system configuration between GOT and the controllers refer to the following Each chapter indicating the system configuration 3 Precautions for hardware To use the multi channel function an option function board is required for ...

Page 717: ...tion is possible 2 Controlling FXCPU third party PLC etc through the network MELSECNET H etc It is possible to control FXCPU third party PLC etc through the network MELSECNET H etc For example it is possible to execute read write of a device such as FXCPU when the condition is satisfied using the device of the PLC CPU on the network MELSECNET H etc as the trigger for action 3 With one GOT the Ethe...

Page 718: ...3 Servo amplifier connection Channel No 4 Connection cable QCPU Connection cable Connection cable Connection cable OMRON PLC OMRON temperature controller MELSERVO J2 Super series GOT PLC Connection type Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment Channel No Option device Model MELSEC Q Bus connection For the system configuration between GOT and the controllers refer to the following Each ...

Page 719: ...an be set to Channels No 5 to 8 For the system configuration and connection condition with the controller refer to the chapter of each controller 1 Only one channel can be assigned to one driver Channel No Driver 1 Reference 5 to 7 Barcode Reader RFID Controller PC Remote Operation Serial Printer Serial GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Microcomputer MODBUS Products Peripherals FINGERPRINT AUTHENTI...

Page 720: ...ction cable Connection cable Connection cable Connection cable GOT FXCPU ALLEN BRADLEY PLC Robot controller QCPU PLC Connection type Connection cable GOT Number of connectable equipment Channel No Option device Model MELSEC FX Direct CPU connection For the system configuration between GOT and the controllers refer to the following Each chapter indicating the system configuration 1 GT15 RS2T4 9P 4 ...

Page 721: ...y settings using the multi channel function for the first time Multi channel function specifications How the units are installed and the multi channel function specifications are described below 1 Image drawing of unit installation 3rd stage Extension interface 1 Extension interface 2 Standard interface For GT16 The RS 232 interface the USB interface the RS 422 485 interface and the Ethernet inter...

Page 722: ...ernal device 4 is not included in the count of the number of channels GT14 The interface used for connecting to an external device 4 is not included in the count of the number of channels For the Ethernet connection 2 up to 2 channels can be set GT1455 QTBDE GT1450 QMBDE and GT1450 QLBDE only When the Ethernet interface built in the GOT is used for connection other than communication with a contro...

Page 723: ...GT12 GT11 GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 22 MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 6 GT16M V4 GT15V 75V4 GT16M R2 GT15V 75R1 GT16M V4R1 GT15V 75V4R1 GT16M ROUT GT15V 75ROUT GT16M MMR 7 GT15 75QBUSL GT15 75QBUS2L GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L GT15 75J71LP23 Z GT15 75J71BR13 Z GT15 75J61BT13 Z Usable units differ depending on the GOT For units usable with each GOT refer to the following manuals Us...

Page 724: ...T supplies power to a barcode reader or a RFID controller from the standard interface add their consumed current Maximum value is less than 0 3 A GOT type Capacity A GOT type Capacity A GT1695M X 2 4 GT1595 X 2 13 GT1685M S 2 4 GT1585V S 1 74 GT1675M S 2 4 GT1585 S 1 74 GT1675M V 2 4 GT1575V S 2 2 GT1675 VN GT1672 VN 2 4 GT1575 S 2 2 GT1665M S 2 4 GT1575 V GT1572 VN 2 2 GT1665M V 2 4 GT1565 V GT15...

Page 725: ...71 100 for the gateway function and a bar code reader 0 12 A to the GT1575 V Since the calculated value is within the capacity of the GOT they can be connected to the GOT b When connecting the GT15 J71BR13 GT15 RS4 9S 2 units GT15 J71E71 100 for the gateway function and a bar code reader 0 12 A to the GT1585 S Since the calculated value exceeds the capacity of the GOT such configuration is not all...

Page 726: ...nection type and channel No System selection Interface selection Determine the GOT side interface and communication units to be used for the multichannel function 22 3 4 Determining the GOT side interface Interface selection Checking the unit installation position Determine the communication unit installation position 1 3 7 Installing a unit on another unit Checking the unit installation position ...

Page 727: ...Field Network connection 12 CC Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION CC Link connection intelligent device station 13 CC Link CONNECTION INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION CNC connection MELSECNET 10 connection PLC to PLC network 18 2 2 MELSECNET 10 connection PLC to PLC network CNC connection CC Link connection intelligent device station 18 2 3 CC Link connection intelligent device station Ethernet connection...

Page 728: ...TION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 2 Serial Connection 11 CONNECTION TO GE FANUC PLC 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 14 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 16 CONNECTION TO MURATEC CONTROLLER Third party safety controller connection Non Mitsubishi Electric Products 2 13 CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER Third party servo amplifier connection Non Mitsubishi Electric Products 1 14 CONNECTION TO PANASO...

Page 729: ...ion multimedia function and RGB display function cannot be used together The CF card unit and the CF card extension unit cannot be used at the same time For details refer to the following 22 3 4 Determining the GOT side interface Interface selection 2 For the FA transparent function via the RS 232 connection the RS 232 interface built in the GOT is available only When the RS 232 interface built in...

Page 730: ...N INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION Robot controller connection 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION CNC connection MELSECNET 10 connection PLC to PLC network 18 2 2 MELSECNET 10 connection PLC to PLC network CNC connection CC Link connection intelligent device station 18 2 3 CC Link connection intelligent device station CNC connection Ethernet connection 18 2 4 Ethernet connection Third party PLC connection E...

Page 731: ...ION TO FUJI FA PLC 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 2 Serial Connection 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 2 Serial Connection 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 2 Serial Connection 11 CONNECTION TO GE FANUC PLC 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 14 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 16 CONNECTION TO MURATEC CONTROLLER Third party safety controller connection Non Mitsubishi Electric Products 2 13 CONNE...

Page 732: ...rface built in the GOT is already used the FA transparent function is not available 3 GT14 For GT14 the combinations of the Ethernet connection and the serial connection are available as shown in the following table Continued to next page Item Allowable combination of connection types GOT to be used Functions that are restricted by the connection type 1 2 GT1595 GT1585 GT157 GT156 GT155 FA transpa...

Page 733: ...HIBA PLC 15 CONNECTION TO PANASONIC EW PLC Non Mitsubishi Electric Products 2 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 2 Serial Connection 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 2 Serial Connection 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 11 2 Serial Connection 14 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 16 CONNECTION TO MURATEC CONTROLLER Third party safety controller connection Non Mitsubishi Electric Products 2 13 CONNECTION TO SICK ...

Page 734: ...C 7 CONNECTION TO KOYO EI PLC 8 CONNECTION TO JTEKT PLC 9 CONNECTION TO SHARP PLC 12 CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA PLC 13 CONNECTION TO TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC 15 CONNECTION TO PANASONIC PLC Non Mitsubishi Electric Products 2 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 3 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI FA PLC 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 2 Serial Connection 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 2 Serial Connecti...

Page 735: ... combination of the functions to be used Barcode function RFID function For details refer to the following 22 3 4 Determining the GOT side interface Interface selection 2 When any of the connection methods below is used Ethernet connection cannot be used although Ethernet download and gateway function can be used MODBUS TCP Connection 3 For the FA transparent function via the RS 232 connection the...

Page 736: ...o 8 for each external device a Number of external devices that can be connected to the GOT One fingerprint unit barcode reader RFID controller personal computer or serial printer can be connected to one GOT One driver must be set for one channel No No 5 to No 8 in the communication settings b Operator authentication external authentication or fingerprint authentication When using the operator auth...

Page 737: ...terface 1 Extension interface 2 Standard interface 1 RS 232 interface built in the GOT Allows a controller to be connected via the serial communication For RS 232 communications connect RS 232 cable For RS 422 communications attach an RS 422 conversion unit and connect RS 422 cable to it For the GT1655 the RS 422 conversion unit is not applicable Extension interface allows the installation of a co...

Page 738: ...mmunication For RS 232 communications connect RS 232 cable For RS 422 communications attach an RS 422 conversion unit and connect RS 422 cable to it For the GT155 the RS 422 conversion unit is not applicable Extension interface allows the installation of a communication unit up to the 3rd stage respectively For the GT155 only one extension interface can be installed A communication unit installed ...

Page 739: ...ield Network connection CC Link connection intelligent device station CNC connection MELSECNET 10 connection PLC to PLC network CC Link connection intelligent device station Ethernet connection This section GOT interface used for Ethernet connection Third party PLC connection Ethernet connection MODBUS TCP connection Robot controller connection CNC connection Ethernet connection Microcomputer conn...

Page 740: ...3 Z and GT15 75J61BT13 Z are not applicable 2 GT15 No unit can be mounted on the GT15 75J71LP23 Z GT15 75J71BR13 Z or GT15 75J61BT13 Z For the GT155 the GT15 75J71LP23 Z GT15 75J71BR13 Z and GT15 75J61BT13 Z are not applicable Therefore the RS 232 interface built in the GOT is used for the serial connection Because of this the functions using the RS 232 interface including the barcode function are...

Page 741: ...y function are available using the Ethernet interface built in the GOT one channel 4 GT12 The Ethernet download and the gateway function are available using the Ethernet interface built in the GOT one channel GOT interface used for serial connection For the serial connection provide interfaces equivalent to the number of channels by using the following interfaces built in the GOT and communication...

Page 742: ... up by the individual functions number of slots a Report function when using a PictBridge compatible printer hard copy function when using a PictBridge compatible printer operation panel function external I O function and sound output function Interface Name model Interface built in GOT RS 232 interface 1 2 Serial communication module GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S GT15 RS4 TE Interface Name model Interf...

Page 743: ...copy function when using a serial printer A video input unit an RGB input unit a video RGB input unit an RGB output unit or a multimedia unit is required corresponding to the function to be used Each type of unit uses 1 stage 2 slots of extension interface Only one piece of each type of unit can be installed on a GOT The CF card unit or CF card extension unit is required The CF card unit or CF car...

Page 744: ... following User s Manual of GOT used Example 1 To add the printer output when using a PictBridge compatible printer and the Ethernet download in a system using the bus connection 1 channel serial connection 3 channels and the barcode function a For GT16 Mount the printer unit at the third stage and use the Ethernet interface built in the GOT This enables both the printer output of the report funct...

Page 745: ...ULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION Example 2 To add the serial connection 1 channel to the system using the bus connection unit occupying 2 slots 1 channel the serial connection 2 channels the video display and the barcode function Since there are no available areas left for installing a unit serial connection can be used for up to 2 channels Video input unit Barcode reader Bus conne...

Page 746: ...heck Sheet Write down the following items selected in this section to the check sheet Selection of interface communication unit Write down the name of interface and the model name of communication unit to be used for each of the connection type Continued to next page Write Check Sheet ...

Page 747: ...ation unit 1 Write down the name of communication unit to be used for each of the connection type For the GT155 setting is made only for Extension interface 1 When GT15 QBUS2 ABUS2 is used although GT15 RS2 9P is installed physically at the 2nd stage of extend interface 2 the GOT recognizes the position as the 1st stage Therefore in the check sheet the position should be entered as 1st stage 2 Aft...

Page 748: ...own CH No write down the communication driver name for each connection type For the communication drivers used for the respective connection types refer to the following Chapters of each respective connection type For the GT155 setting is made only for Extension interface 1 ...

Page 749: ...osition of the respective communication units 3rd stage Extend interface 1 Extend interface 2 RS 232 interface built in a GOT 2nd stage 1st stage 22 5 Multi channel Function Check Sheet Make settings for Communication Settings by GT Designer3 referring to the check sheet where the necessary information has been written The positions that the settings should be made on the communication settings sc...

Page 750: ...ls Bar code reader In the case of the GT157 4 5 1 2 3 Serial communication unit GT15 RS2 9P OMRON temperature controller connection Serial communication unit GT15 RS4 9P Inverter connection Serial communication unit GT15 RS2 9P FXCPU direction CPU connection Bus connection unit GT15 QBUS2 QCPU bus connection Bar code reader 5 4 1 2 3 ...

Page 751: ...ECTION 20 GOT MULTI DROP CONNECTION 21 MULTIPLE GT14 GT12 GT11 GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 22 MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION Example Setting example for MELSECNET H connection 1 channel Serial connection 1 channel In the case of the GT155 MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 Serial communication unit GT15 RS2 9P FXCPU direction CPU connection ...

Page 752: ...de Settings Example Setting example for Ethernet connection 4 channels In the case of the GT1685 YASKAWA PLC Ethernet connection MODBUS TCP connection YOKOGAWA PLC Ethernet connection QCPU Ethernet connection Ethernet interface built in the GOT ...

Page 753: ...e following describes that should be understood before starting drawing and the functions that should be set beforehand when using the multi channel function Device settings It is necessary to set the device to be used together with the CH No GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual Accessible range for monitoring The accessible range for monitoring is not changed even when the multi channel func...

Page 754: ...tching function Set the controller for which the station No switching function should be executed by the CH No GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual CH No 1 Mitsubishi Electric PLC CH No 2 Servo amplifier CH No 3 OMRON PLC CH No 4 Temperature controller Broadcast is executed for CH No 1 and CH No 3 10 10 10 10 C H ARGE M I T S UBISHI 10 10 FA transparent function is executed for CH No 1 C H AR...

Page 755: ...ed system alarm is used if the system alarms with the same error code occur in different channels the GOT treats the alarms as the same system alarm Therefore if the system alarms with the same error code occur one by one the time of later system alarm occurrence is not reflected to the GOT Confirmation of the channel No at which a system alarm occurred When a system alarm occurred confirm the cha...

Page 756: ... the multi channel function Write Check Sheet The following symbols are used for each purpose Indicates parts where items and details are to be written Confirm the details and write them to the check sheet Indicates parts where written details are to be checked Confirm the details and perform the Communication Settings Check Enter the selections having been made in the steps above to the check she...

Page 757: ... Channel No of PLC motion controller CPU temperature controller inverter servo amplifier CNC robot controller No 1 to No 4 2 Channel No of fingerprint unit barcode reader RFID controller personal computer serial printer No 5 to No 8 CH No Selection of connection type 22 3 3 Selection of interface communication unit 22 3 4 1 Connection name 2 Connection name 3 Connection name 4 Connection name CH N...

Page 758: ...name CHNo Driver name Connecting a fingerprint unit barcode reader RFID controller or personal computer Connecting a personal computer 9 8 Host PC Driver name Driver name Driver name Driver name 1 3 5 6 7 Standard interface 4 only one connection Connecting a controller Without multi channel Ethernet connection Com unit name CHNo Driver name Connecting a controller With multi channel Ethernet conne...

Page 759: ...for Extension interface 1 7 4 2 Extension interface 1 Extension interface 2 1st stage 2nd stage 3rd stage Com unit name CH No Com unit name CH No Com unit name CH No 1st stage 2nd stage 3rd stage Com unit name CH No Driver name Com unit name CH No Com unit name CH No Standard interface 1 Connecting a controller Com unit name CH No Driver name Connecting a fingerprint unit barcode reader RFID contr...

Page 760: ...22 46 22 MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 5 Multi channel Function Check Sheet ...

Page 761: ...FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23 1 ...

Page 762: ......

Page 763: ...E GT14 GT12 GT11 GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 22 MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23 1 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23 1 FA Transparent Function 23 2 23 2 Compatible Software 23 2 23 3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored 23 15 23 4 System Configuration 23 34 23 5 GOT Side Settings 23 45 23 6 Personal Computer Side Setting 23 48 23 7 Precautions 23 85 ...

Page 764: ...Accessing by CW Configurator 23 6 3 Accessing the PLC by the GX Developer PX Developer GX Configurator 23 6 4 Accessing by GX Works2 23 6 5 Accessing by GX LogViewer 23 6 6 Accessing PLC by GX Configurator QP 23 6 7 Accessing by the MT Developer 23 6 8 Accessing by the MT Works2 23 6 9 Accessing the servo amplifier by the MR Configurator 23 6 10 Accessing the servo amplifier by the MR Configurator...

Page 765: ...GX Configurator FL Version 1 21X or later GX Configurator PT Version 1 20W or later 6 RT ToolBox2 Version 1 1 or later is required to use the FA transparent function 7 GX Configurator QP Version2 32J or later is required to use the FA transparent function 8 MT Works2 Version 1 00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function 9 MELSOFT Navigator Version 1 04E or later is required to use ...

Page 766: ...plicable to FX PCS WIN 6 FX Configurator FP Version 1 30 or later is required to use the FA transparent function 7 RT ToolBox2 Version 1 1 or later is required to use the FA transparent function 8 GX Configurator QP Version2 32J or later is required to use the FA transparent function 9 MT Works2 Version 1 00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function 10 MELSOFT Navigator Version 1 04...

Page 767: ...Use MX Component Version 3 14Q or later for MX Sheet 18 Start MR Configurator2 with MT Developer2 Version 1 10L or later 19 CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool Version 1 04E or later is required to use the FA transparent function 20 MR Configurator2 Version 1 09K or later is required to use the FA transparent function 21 A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in direct CPU conne...

Page 768: ...r Version 8 88S or later is required to use the FA transparent function 7 GX Works2 Version 1 11M or later is required to use the FA transparent function 8 MELSOFT Navigator Version 1 07H or later is required to use the FA transparent function 9 MX Component Version 4 03D or later is required to use the FA transparent function 10 Use MX Component Version 3 14Q or later for MX Sheet 11 CPU Module L...

Page 769: ...r is required between the GOT and PLC in Ethernet connection 16 GX Works2 Version 1 98C or later is required to use the FA transparent function 17 MT Works2 Version 1 100E or later is required to use the FA transparent function 18 MX Component Version 4 06G or later is required to use the FA transparent function 19 Use MX Component Version 4 06G or later for MX Sheet 20 GX Works3 Version 1 005F or...

Page 770: ...n 1 00A or later is required to use the FA transparent function 9 MELSOFT Navigator Version 1 04E or later is required to use the FA transparent function 10 GX Works2 Version 1 03D or later is required to use the FA transparent function 11 NC Configurator Version A0 or later is required to use the FA transparent function 12 MX Component Version 3 14Q or later is required to use the FA transparent ...

Page 771: ...n 2 04E or later GX Configurator SC Version 2 10L or later GX Configurator CT Version 1 23Zor later GX Configurator TI Version 1 22Y or later GX Configurator TC Version 1 21X or later GX Configurator AS Version 1 20W or later GX Configurator FL Version 1 21X or later GX Configurator PT Version 1 20W or later 7 FX Configurator FP Version 1 30 or later is required to use the FA transparent function ...

Page 772: ...mputer link connection The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs 1 GX Developer Version 8 62Q or later is required to use the FA transparent function GX Developer Version 8 68W or later is required to use the FA transparent function when connecting the QnUDE H CPU to the GOT 2 PX Developer Version 1 18U or later is required to use the FA transparent function 3 GX Configurator QP...

Page 773: ...Tool Version 1 04E or later is required to use the FA transparent function 15 RT ToolBox2 Version 1 7 or later is required to use the FA transparent function 16 MR Configurator2 Version 1 09K or later is required to use the FA transparent function 17 A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in Ethernet connection 18 Setting Monitoring tool for C Controller module Version 4 00A or la...

Page 774: ...E Controller Network connection GT16 only The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs 1 GX Works2 Version 1 525X or later is required to use the FA transparent function PLC CPU Software QCPU Q mode GX Works2 1 Motion controller CPU Q Series Q170MCPU Q170MSCPU Q170MSCPU S1 only GX Works2 1 ...

Page 775: ... Works2 Version 1 25B or later is required for MT Works2 to use the FA transparent function 7 MR Configurator2 Version 1 07H or later is required for MR Configurator2 to use the FA transparent function 8 MR Configurator2 Version 1 09K or later is required to use the FA transparent function 9 A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection 10 GX Works3 Version 1 005...

Page 776: ...ws the software and the accessible PLC CPUs 1 GX Developer Version 8 78G or later is required to use the FA transparent function 2 GX Works2 Version 1 16S or later is required to use the FA transparent function 3 MX Component Version 4 06G or later is required to use the FA transparent function 4 Use MX Component Version 4 06G or later for MX Sheet 4 When connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet con...

Page 777: ...t to the RnSFCPU on the base unit The RnSFCPU and the safety function module R6SFM must have the same pair version If their pair versions differ the RnSFCPU does not operate 4 MX Component Version 4 11M or later is required to use the FA transparent function MX Sheet please use the MX Component Version 4 11M or later Series Model name Target software Connection type Bus connection Direct CPU conne...

Page 778: ...r Network Series Model name Target software Connection type Bus connection Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection CC Link IE Controller Network connection 2 MELSEC Q Q mode Q00JCPU GX Developer 4 GX Works2 GX Configurator 4 PX Developer 4 MX Component 4 MX Sheet 4 Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Main bas...

Page 779: ...e FA transparent function through CC Link IE Controller Network 7 GT15 GT12 and GT11 are not applicable to Q26DHCCPU LS Continued to next page Series Model name Target software Connection type Bus connection Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection CC Link IE Controller Network connection 3 C Controller module Q Series Q12DCCPU V Q24DHCCPU V VG Q24DHCCPU LS Q26DHCCPU LS 7...

Page 780: ...s Model name Target software Connection type Bus connection Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection CC Link IE Controller Network connection 3 MELSEC A AnSCPU A2USCPU GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet A2USCPU S1 A2USHCPU S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24 R2 A1SHCPU A2SCPU 1 A2SCPU S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU S3 A1SJHCPU MELSEC A A0J2HCPU GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet 4...

Page 781: ...es Model name Target software Connection type Bus connection Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection CC Link IE Controller Network connection 1 Motion controller CPU A Series A273UCPU GX Developer MX Component MX Sheet 2 A273UHCPU A273UHCPU S3 A373UCPU A373UCPU S3 A171SCPU A171SCPU S3 A171SCPU S3N A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU S1 MELSEC FX...

Page 782: ...on type Bus connection Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection CC Link IE Controller Network connection 4 MELSECNET H Remote I O station QJ72LP25 25 QJ72LP25G QJ72BR15 CC Link IE Field Network head module LJ72GF15 T2 CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF ETB GX Works2 CNC CNC C70 Q173NCCPU CR750 Q Q172DRCPU CR751 Q Q172DRCPU GX Developer NC Configurator ...

Page 783: ...EL FUNCTION 23 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 1 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455 QTBDE GT1450 QMBDE and GT1450 QLBDE Series Model name Target software Connection type Bus connection Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection CC Link IE Controller Network connection 1 MELSERVO MR J2S A MR J2S CP MR J2S CL MR J2M P8A MR J2M DU MR JE A MR J3 A MR J3 T M...

Page 784: ...ion 4 11M or later is required to use the FA transparent function MX Sheet please use the MX Component Version 4 11M or later Series Model name Target software Connection type Bus connection Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection CC Link IE Controller Network connection 1 1 1 MELSECiQ R Series R04CPU GX Works3 MX Component MX Sheet 2 2 R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R08PC...

Page 785: ... does not support the FA transparent function through CC Link IE Controller Network Series Model name Target software Connection type Bus connection Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection CC Link IE Controller Network connection 2 2 2 MELSEC Q Q mode Q00JCPU GX Works2 MX Component 4 MX Sheet 4 3 3 3 Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU ...

Page 786: ...ion Computer link connection Ethernet connection CC Link IE Controller Network connection 1 C controller module Q Series Q12DCCPU V Q24DHCCPU V VG Q24DHCCPU LS Q26DHCCPU LS 5 GX Works2 MX Component 4 MX Sheet 4 2 3 3 Q24DHCCPU V VG Q24DHCCPU LS Q26DHCCPU LS 5 Setting Monitoring tool for C Controller module 2 3 3 MELSEC QS QS001CPU MELSEC L L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU BT L02CPU P L06CPU P L26CPU P ...

Page 787: ... and GT1450 QLBDE Series Model name Target software Connection type Bus connection Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection CC Link IE Controller Network connection 1 MELSEC A AnCPU A2NCPUP21 A2NCPUR21 A2NCPU S1 A2NCPUP21 S1 A2NCPUR21 S1 A3NCPU A3NCPUP21 A3NCPUR21 MELSEC A AnSCPU A2USCPU A2USCPU S1 A2USHCPU S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24 R2 A1SHCPU A2SCPU A2SCPU S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU S...

Page 788: ...rget software Connection type Bus connection Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection CC Link IE Controller Network connection 1 Motion controller CPU Q Series Q172DCPU MT Works2 2 3 2 3 Q173DCPU Q172DCPU S1 Q173DCPU S1 Q172DSCPU Q173DSCPU Q170MCPU MT Works2 4 GX Works2 2 2 Q170MSCPU Q170MSCPU S1 Motion controller CPU A Series A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU S3 A373UCPU A373...

Page 789: ...tion type Bus connection Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection CC Link IE Controller Network connection 1 MELSECNET H Remote I O station QJ72LP25 25 QJ72LP25G QJ72BR15 CC Link IE Field Network head module LJ72GF15 T2 CC Link IE Field Network Ethernet adapter module NZ2GF ETB CNC CNC C70 Q173NCCPU MELDAS C6 C64 Robot controller CRnQ 700 Q172DRCPU CR750 Q Q172DRCPU CR751...

Page 790: ...he same pair version If their pair versions differ the RnSFCPU does not operate Series Model name Target software Connection type Bus connection Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection CC LinkIE Controller Network connection 1 1 1 MELSECiQ R Series R04CPU GX Works3 MX Component MX Sheet 2 2 2 R08CPU R16CPU R32CPU R120CPU R08PCPU R16PCPU R32PCPU R120PCPU R04ENCPU R08ENCPU...

Page 791: ... only GT1455 QTBDE GT1450 QMBDE and GT1450 QLBDE Series Model name Target software Connection type Bus connection Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection CC Link IE Controller Network connection 2 MELSEC Q Q mode Q00JCPU GX Developer GX Works2 Q00CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Main base Q25PRHCPU Main base ...

Page 792: ...ule Q Series Q12DCCPU V Q24DHCCPU V VG Q24DHCCPU LS Q26DHCCPU LS MELSEC QS QS001CPU MELSEC L L02CPU L06CPU L26CPU L26CPU BT L02CPU P L06CPU P L26CPU P L26CPU PBT L02SCPU L02SCPU P MELSEC Q A mode Q02CPU A Q02HCPU A Q06HCPU A MELSEC QnA QnACPU Q2ACPU Q2ACPU S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU MELSEC QnA QnASCPU Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 MELSEC A AnCPU A2UCPU A2UCPU S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU A2ACPU...

Page 793: ...E and GT1450 QLBDE Series Model name Target software Connection type Bus connection Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection CC Link IE Controller Network connection 1 MELSEC A AnSCPU A2USCPU A2USCPU S1 A2USHCPU S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24 R2 A1SHCPU A2SCPU 1 A2SCPU S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU S1 A1SJCPU A1SJCPU S3 A1SJHCPU MELSEC A A0J2HCPU A0J2HCPUP21 A0J2HCPUR21 A0J2HCPU DC24 A2CCPU A2...

Page 794: ...pe Bus connection Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection CC Link IE Controller Network connection 1 Motion controller CPU A Series A273UCPU A273UHCPU A273UHCPU S3 A373UCPU A373UCPU S3 A171SCPU A171SCPU S3 A171SCPU S3N A171SHCPU A171SHCPUN A172SHCPU A172SHCPUN A173UHCPU A173UHCPU S1 MELSEC FX FX0 GX Developer FX0S FX0N FX1 FX2 FX2C FX1S FX1N FX2N FX1NC FX2NC FX3S FX3G C ...

Page 795: ...PU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection CC Link IE Controller Network connection 1 MELSECNET H Remote I O station QJ72LP25 25 QJ72LP25G QJ72BR15 CC Link IE Field Network head module LJ72GF15 T2 CNC CNC C70 Q173NCCPU MELDAS C6 C64 Robot controller CRnQ 700 Q172DRCPU CR750 Q Q172DRCPU CR751 Q Q172DRCPU CRnD 700 CR750 D CR751 D FREQROL FREQROL A500 A500L FREQROL F500 F500L FREQROL ...

Page 796: ... 9S 3m 3m GX Works3 CW Configurator MX Component MX Sheet 1 personal computer for 1 GOT RS 232 GT01 C30R2 6P 3m GT10 RS2TUSB 5S 4 GT09 C30USB 5P 3m GT09 C20USB 5P 2m USB GT09 C30USB 5P 3m GT09 C20USB 5P 2m 3m For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC refer to the following CC Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION RS 232 GT01 C30R2 9S 3m 3m GX Works2 1 personal computer for 1 GOT USB GT0...

Page 797: ...ration Tool are not applicable to the bus connection 3 GT11 and GT10 are not applicable to the Ethernet connection 4 The use of RS 232 USB conversion adaptor requires an installation of the dedicated communication driver onto personal computer For details refer to the following manual RS 232 USB Conversion adaptor User s Manual 5 GX LogViewer MX Component MX Sheet QnUDVCPU LCPU Logging Configurati...

Page 798: ...ical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 4 LCPU is not applicable to the bus connection 5 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455 QTBDE GT1450 QMBDE and GT1450 QLBDE 6 Not applicable to Setting Monitoring tool for C Controller module Connection type dependant Communication driver GOT PC PLC Varies according to the connection...

Page 799: ...GT11 and GT10 are not applicable to the Ethernet connection 5 Not applicable to CW Configurator Connection type dependant Communication driver GOT Modem PLC Varies according to the connection type Connection cable Adapter cable Connection cable Phone line PC Modem PLC GOT Adapter cable Connection cable Modem Phone line Personal computer 3 Number of connectable equipment Connection type Model Inter...

Page 800: ... PLC GOT Connection cable Personal computer Number of connectable equipment Connection type Model Interface Cable model Max distance Software For the system configuration between the GOT and PLC refer to the following BUS CONNECTION DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION RS 232 GT01 C30R2 9S 3m 3m PX Developer GX Configurator 1 personal computer for 1 GOT USB GT09 C30USB 5P 3m GT09 C20U...

Page 801: ...ELSEC iQ R Series does not support the bus connection direct CPU connection and GOT multi drop connection 5 GT15 GT12 and GT11 do not support the motion controller CPU MELSEC iQ R Series Connection type dependant Communication driver GOT QCPU Motion controller CPU Q series RCPU Motion controller CPU MELSEC iQ R series PC Connection cable Varies according to the connection type PLC GOT Connection c...

Page 802: ...ber of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used 10BASE T Max 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 4 LCPU is not applicable to the bus connection 5 GT14 model...

Page 803: ...on and direct CPU connection 3 GT15 GT12 and GT11 do not support the motion controller CPU MELSEC iQ R Series Connection type dependant Communication driver GOT Servo amplifier Servo amplifier QCPU Motion controller CPU Q series RCPU Motion controller CPU MELSEC iQ R series PC Connection cable Varies according to the connection type SSCNET SSCNET H PLC GOT Connection cable Personal computer Number...

Page 804: ...ctable nodes when a repeater hub is used 10BASE T Max 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 4 LCPU is not applicable to the bus connection 5 GT14 models compatible wit...

Page 805: ... computer Number of connectable equipment Connection type Model Interface Cable model Max distance Software For details on the system configuration between GOT and Mitsubishi Electric inverter refer to the following INVERTER CONNECTION RS 232 GT01 C30R2 9S 3m 3m FR Configurator 1 personal computer for 1 GOT USB GT09 C30USB 5P 3m GT09 C20USB 5P 2m 3m GOT PC PLC Varies according to the connection ty...

Page 806: ...tem configuration between the GOT and PLC refer to the following BUS CONNECTION 1 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 1 ETHERNET CONNECTION RS 232 GT01 C30R2 9S 3m 3m RT ToolBox2 1 personal computer for 1 GOT USB GT09 C30USB 5P 3m GT09 C20USB 5P 2m 3m GOT PC Connection cable Q173NCCPU Varies according to the connection type Connection type dependant Communication driver PLC GOT Connection cable Personal comp...

Page 807: ...lick the OK button when settings are completed POINT POINT POINT The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 1 1 2 I F communication setting Communication setting with personal computer Set the communication setting between the GOT and the personal computer For details of the setting contents refer to the following manual Sc...

Page 808: ...ion Range GOT IP Address Set the IP address of the GOT Default 192 168 3 18 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 IP Label Set the IP Label of detail setting Subnet Mask 1 Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connection via router If the sub network is not used the default value is set Default 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Default Gateway 1 Set the router address of the default gateway...

Page 809: ...unction only GT16 GT15 GT14 GT12 specify the channel No on which FA transparent function is executed 1 Select Common GOT Environmental Setting GOT Setup from the menu 2 Check Enable GOT Setup 3 Select the Transparent tab 4 As necessary check one of CH1 to CH4 Default CH1 GT16 GT15 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 GT14 GT12 CH1 CH2 Click the OK button when settings are completed POINT POINT POINT Transparent settin...

Page 810: ...ction Destination on GX Works3 2 Connection Channel Setup is displayed 3 Set Connection Channel Setup PC side I F USB PLC side I F GOT Other Station Setting No Specification 4 Double click GOT of the PLC side I F to display PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT 5 On the PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT mark the via GOT Ethernet transparent mode checkbox and click Setting 6 By clicking Setting t...

Page 811: ...ns to the Connection Channel Setup Click Connection Test to check if GX Works3 has been connected to the RCPU 1 Click Online Specify Connection Destination in GX Works3 2 The Specify Connection Destination 1 is displayed 3 Set the Specify Connection Destination 1 PC side I F Serial USB PLC side I F GOT Other Station Setting No Specification 4 Double click Serial USB of the PC side I F to display P...

Page 812: ...fy Connection Destination Connection1 Click Connection Test to check if GX Works3 has been connected to the FX5UCPU 1 Click Online Specify Connection Destination on GX Works3 2 The Specify Connection Destination 1 is displayed 3 Set the Specify Connection Destination 1 PC side I F Serial USB PLC side I F GOT Other Station Setting No Specification 4 Double click Serial USB of the PC side I F to dis...

Page 813: ...heck mark via GOT direct coupled transparent mode in PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT 8 The screen returns to Specify Connection Destination Connection1 Click Connection Test to check if GX Works3 has been connected to the FX5UCPU 1 Click Online Connection Destination on GX Works3 2 Connection Channel Setup is displayed 3 Set Connection Channel Setup PC side I F USB PLC side I F GOT Other Stat...

Page 814: ...r 2 Connection Channel Setup is displayed 3 Set Connection Channel Setup PC side I F USB PLC side I F GOT Other Station Setting No Specification 4 Double click GOT of the PLC side I F to display PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT 5 On the PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT mark the via GOT Ethernet transparent mode checkbox and click Setting 6 By clicking Setting the GOT Ethernet Transparent S...

Page 815: ...ber for Network No and Station No same as the number assigned to the Ethernet module 9 Specify the IP address for IP Address same as the IP address assigned to the built in Ethernet port QCPU or Ethernet module 10 The screen returns to the Connection Channel Setup Click Connection Test to check if GX Works3 has been connected to the R12CCPU V Successfully connected with the R12CCPU V 1 Click Onlin...

Page 816: ...pled transparent mode 1 This is operation required in the case of using GX Developer of which version is 8 22Y and above 8 The screen returns to Transfer Setup Click Connection Test to check if GX Developer has been connected to the QCPU Q mode Bus connection Direct CPU connection 1 Click Online Transfer Setup in GX Developer 2 The Transfer Setup is displayed 3 Set the Transfer Setup PC side I F S...

Page 817: ... Mark the RS 232C checkbox Mark the USB checkbox 8 The screen returns to Transfer Setup Click Connection Test to check if GX Developer has been connected to the QCPU Q mode When connecting the GOT to PC via modem When connecting the GOT and PC with serial When connecting the GOT and PC with USB 1 Click Online Transfer Setup in GX Developer 2 The Transfer Setup is displayed 3 Set the Transfer Setup...

Page 818: ... H or QJ71E71 for Type name When connecting the Q173NCCPU set QJ71E71 10 Specify the number for Network No and Station No same as the number assigned to the Ethernet module When QnUDE H is set for Type name the setting is not required 11 Specify the IP address for IP address same as the IP address assigned to the built in Ethernet port QCPU or Ethernet module 12 The screen returns to Transfer Setu...

Page 819: ...ark either of the following in PC side I F Serial setting Mark the RS 232C checkbox Mark the USB checkbox 6 The screen returns to the Transfer Setup Click the Connection Test to check if GX Developer has been connected to the FXCPU When connecting the GOT to PC via modem When connecting the GOT and PC with serial When connecting the GOT and PC with USB 1 Click the Connection Destination view Conne...

Page 820: ...heck if GX Works2 has been connected to the QCPU Q mode Bus connection Direct CPU connection 1 Click the Connection Destination view Connection Destination Connection target data name in the Navigation window of GX Works2 2 The Transfer Setup Connection1 is displayed 3 Set the Transfer Setup Connection1 PC side I F Serial USB PLC side I F GOT Other Station Setting No Specification 4 Double click S...

Page 821: ...d Setting of GOT 8 The screen returns to Transfer Setup Connection1 Click Connection Test to check if GX Works2 has been connected to the QCPU Q mode 1 Click the Connection Destination view Connection Destination Connection target data name in the Navigation window of GX Works2 2 The Transfer Setup Connection1 is displayed 3 Set the Transfer Setup Connection1 PC side I F Serial USB PLC side I F GO...

Page 822: ...fy the number for Network No and Station No same as the number assigned to the Ethernet module When QnUDE H is set for PLC type the setting is not required 11 Specify the IP address for IP Address same as the IP address assigned to the built in Ethernet port QCPU or Ethernet module 12 The screen returns to Transfer Setup Connection1 Click Connection Test to check if GX Works2 has been connected to...

Page 823: ...ckbox 6 Double click GOT of the PLC side I F to display PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT 7 On the PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT mark the via GOT Ethernet transparent mode checkbox and click Setting When connecting the GOT and PC with serial When connecting the GOT and PC with USB 8 By clicking Set the GOT Ethernet transparent setting is displayed Here set the FX3U ENET ADP or Ethernet M...

Page 824: ...No 192 168 3 30 1 1 CC Link IE Field Network Master Local module Use default value for settings other than the following Network Type Network No PC No Total Stations CC IE Field Master station 1 0 2 CC Link IE Field Network Master Local module Use default value for settings other than the following Network Type Network No PC No CC IE Field Local station 1 2 GOT Use default value for settings other...

Page 825: ... display PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT 7 Set the CPU mode to LCPU 8 On the PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT mark the via GOT Ethernet transparent mode checkbox and click Setting 9 GOT Ethernet Transparent Setting is displayed Here set the Ethernet module which is firstly connected via a GOT 10 Set NZ2GF ETB for PLC Type 11 Set the same number to IP address as the number assigned to NZ2G...

Page 826: ...unication Route Detailed Setting of CC IE Field is displayed 17 Set Network No and Station No assigned to CPU and click OK When connecting to CC Link IE Field Network Master Local module of the system configuration example the setting is as follows Network No 1 Station No 0 18 The screen returns to Transfer Setup Click Connection Test to check if GX Developer has been connected to the QCPU Q mode ...

Page 827: ... I F Ethernet Board PLC side I F GOT Other Station Setting No specification 4 Double click Ethernet Board of the PC side I F to display PC side I F Ethernet Board Setting 5 Set the protocol to TCP Network No and Station No are not required to be changed default because they are not used For bus connection 6 Double click GOT of the PLC side I F to display PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT 7 Set ...

Page 828: ... Board of the PC side I F to display PC side I F Ethernet Board Setting 5 Set the protocol to TCP Network No and Station No are not required to be changed default because they are not used 6 Double click GOT of the PLC side I F to display PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT 7 Set the IP address and port No in Ethernet detail setting for PC and GOT connection Set the IP address and port No to the ...

Page 829: ...tant Dialog for View on GX LogViewer 2 The Assistant dialog box is displayed 3 Click LCPU Show Logged Device Status in the Assistant dialog box 4 The Transfer Setup Connection 1 dialog box is displayed 5 Set the Transfer Setup Connection 1 PC side I F Serial USB PLC side I F GOT Other Station Setting Select from the system configuration 6 For PC side I F Serial Setting and PLC side I F Detailed Se...

Page 830: ...LC Type Bus Interface PLC Type Direct coupled Interface C24 For bus connection only 5 Set the Module connecting I O address in Connection setup Specify the actual IP address of the module 6 The screen returns to the Connection setup Click the Connection Test to check if GX Developer has been connected to the QD75 QnCPU Bus connection Direct CPU connection Computer link connection 1 Click Communica...

Page 831: ...onnection 4 Check mark either of the following in PLC side I F setting of PLC module via GOT Bus transparent mode via GOT direct coupled transparent mode 5 As necessary select a CPU that is targeted by using the transparent function in CPU 6 Click Connection Test 7 Confirm that the personal computer is connected to the motion controller CPU Q series Bus connection Direct CPU connection 1 Click Tra...

Page 832: ...t to check if MT Works2 has been connected to the motion controller Q mode Bus connection Direct CPU connection 1 Click the Connection Destination view Connection Destination Connection target data name in the Navigation window of MT Works2 2 The Transfer Setup is displayed 3 Set the Transfer Setup PC side I F Serial USB PLC side I F GOT Other Station Setting No Specification 4 Double click Serial...

Page 833: ...t transparent mode checkbox and click Set 8 By clicking Set the GOT Ethernet Transparent Setting is displayed Here set the built in Ethernet port QCPU or Ethernet module which is firstly connected via a GOT 9 Set QnUDE H or QJ71E71 for Type name 10 Specify the number for Network No and Station No same as the number assigned to the Ethernet module When QnUDE H is set for Type name the setting is no...

Page 834: ...thernet Board Setting 5 Set the protocol to TCP Network No and Station No are not required to be changed default because they are not used For bus connection 6 Double click GOT of the PLC side I F to display PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT 7 Set the IP address and port No in Ethernet detail setting for PC and GOT connection Set the IP address and port No to the same as the Ethernet download s...

Page 835: ...rator2 Make the FA transparent settings with the of MT Works2 For details refer to the following 23 6 8 Accessing by the MT Works2 23 6 11 Accessing the inverter by the FR Configurator This section explains the setting method of the FA transparent function of FR Configurator with an example of connecting to FREQROL A700 F700 series 1 Click Settings Communication Settings in FR Configurator 2 Check...

Page 836: ...C side Mark the RS 232 FX USB AW FX3U USB BD Included checkbox Mark the USB GOT Transparent checkbox 3 Click Comm Test 4 After the communication test is completed check that the GOT is correctly connected to the FXCPU When connecting the GOT and PC with serial When connecting the GOT and PC with USB 1 Click Transfer setup on the FX3U ENET L Configuration tool 2 Mark the Serial port USB checkbox in...

Page 837: ...A TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 23 6 14 Accessing by RT ToolBox2 This section explains the procedure to set the FA transparent function of RT ToolBox2 with an example of connecting to CRnQ 700 Connecting the GOT and Controller in bus connection or direct CPU connection CRnQ 700 5 After the communication test is completed check that the GOT is correctly connected to the FXCPU 1 Right click a project name to...

Page 838: ...e via GOT direct coupled transparent mode 7 As necessary select a CPU that is targeted in CPU When connecting the GOT and PC with serial When connecting the GOT and PC with USB Bus connection Direct CPU connection 1 Right click a project name to be a target on the project tree of RT ToolBox2 Click Edit Project 2 Set Method to CRnQ 3 Click Detail 4 Check mark either of the following in Serial port ...

Page 839: ...PLC side I F setting of PLC module mark the via GOT Ethernet transparent mode checkbox and click Set 7 Set QJ71E71 for Type 8 Specify the number assigned to the Ethernet module for Network No Station No and IP Address in Module side 9 Specify the number assigned to the GOT for Network No Station No and IP Address in GOT side 10 As necessary select a CPU that is targeted in CPU 1 Click File Open 2 ...

Page 840: ... Click Online Batch Read in MELSOFT Navigator 2 The Batch Read is displayed 3 Select the projects to be read from Select Project and set the storage destination of the workspace in Save Workspace 4 Click Execute to read and display the specified project 1 Click Online Transfer Setup 2 The Transfer Setup is displayed 3 Set the Transfer Setup PC side I F Serial USB PLC side I F GOT Other Station Set...

Page 841: ... communication 1 Click the Connection Destination view Connection Destination Connection target data name in the Navigation window of MT Setting Monitoring tool for C Controller module 2 The Transfer Setup is displayed 3 Set the Transfer Setup PLC side I F GOT Other station No specification 4 Double click GOT of the CPU side I F to display CPU side I F Detailed Setting of GOT 5 Mark the via GOT Bu...

Page 842: ... IP address same as the IP address assigned to the C Controller module Q Series Q24DHCCPU V 8 The screen returns to Transfer Setup Click Connection Test to check if Setting Monitoring tool for C Controller module has been connected to the C Controller module Q Series Q24DHCCPU V 1 Click the Connection Destination view Connection Destination Connection target data name in the Navigation window of M...

Page 843: ...heet refer to the following manual MX Sheet Version 2 Operating Manual Introduction MX Component Version 4 Operating Manual When MX Component is used alone Start Communication Setting Utility and start communication setting from the following step 3 6 Double click GOT of the PLC side I F to display PLC side I F Detailed Setting of GOT 7 Set the IP address and port No in Ethernet detail setting for...

Page 844: ... 3 Click Wizard 4 Set Logical station number and click Next 5 Select either of the following option from PC side I F according to the connection configuration and click Next USB Via GOT Serial Via GOT Ethernet Board Via GOT GOT and USB connection GOT and Serial connection GOT and Ethernet connection ...

Page 845: ...connection configuration Serial Bus connection Ethernet Direct CPU connection Bus connection Ethernet connection 7 Select either of the following option from Connect module according to the setting of GOT PLC I F and click Next For Serial CPU unit RJ71C24 QJ71C24 LJ71C24 For Bus connection CPU unit For Ethernet CPU unit QJ71E71 RJ71E71 CC IE Field Ethernet adapter FX3U ENET ADP FX3U ENET L CPU uni...

Page 846: ... Computer Side Setting 9 Select Station type CPU type and Multiple CPU according to the connection configuration and click Next 10 Set Comment and click Finish 11 Click Connection test 12 Click Test and check that normal communication is performed ...

Page 847: ...GOT monitoring is faulty The FA transparent function cannot be used in case that the GOT monitoring is faulty due to PLC CPU errors or faulty communication between the PLC CPU and GOT When GOT monitoring is faulty check the following 1 Whether the PLC CPU operates normally Refer to the User s Manual of the PLC CPU you use 2 Whether the PLC CPU and GOT are connected normally 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRE...

Page 848: ... Works3 GX Works2 GX Developer When the FA transparent function is used in an Ethernet connection the following GX Works3 GX Works2 GX Developer cannot be executed The message The executed function is not supported Please check the manual and other documentation is displayed on GX Works3 GX Works2 GX Developer 2 GOT station monitoring function When the FA transparent function is used in an Etherne...

Page 849: ... When connecting to QCPU A mode set the PLC type to A4UCPU or QCPU A mode on GX Works3 GX Works2 GX Developer When connecting the GOT and PC with RS 232 The Transmission speed setting in PC side I F Serial setting in GX Works3 GX Works2 GX Developer must be within the range supported by the connected CPU When monitor conditions have been set on GX Works3 GX Works2 GX Developer 1 Monitoring perform...

Page 850: ...ith the recipe in process signal in GOT system information OFF PLC file system error Unable to communicate with PLC Error messages on GOT Corrective action on GOT side Error messages on GX Developer and GX Works2 Corrective action on GX Developer and GX Works2 No message is displayed The TC set value space is blank With no file operation being executed on GX Works3 GX Works2 GX Developer re execut...

Page 851: ... 2 Communication settings When the FA transparent function is used via modem the communication setting differs depending on the connection target of the GOT Set as follows 1 Communication settings of GX Works2 GX Developer are set automatically and setting is not required When connecting the ACPU and motion controller CPU A series in bus connection Do not execute write during RUN with GX Developer...

Page 852: ...ed GOT monitoring immediately To cancel the suspended 45 seconds GOT monitoring immediately after FA transparent is executed input 1 to device GS457 Then GOT resumes monitoring If FA transparent is resumed even if 1 is already input to device GS457 an error will occur on FR Configurator For the details of the device refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual When using...

Page 853: ...Direct connection to CPU 6 7 Ethernet connection 8 14 MELSECNET 10 connection PLC to PLC network 10 8 10 9 MELSECNET H connection PLC to PLC network 9 8 CNC connection CC Link connection intelligent device station 18 5 Direct connection to CPU 18 3 Ethernet connection 18 6 MELSECNET 10 connection PLC to PLC network 18 4 CNC side settings 18 16 Coaxial cable 1 30 Communication module 1 18 Computer ...

Page 854: ...n 16 15 H HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 1 I I F 1 9 I F communication setting 1 13 Inverter FREQROL A500 A500L F500 F500L V500 V500L 15 3 FREQROL A700 F700 F700P 15 14 FREQROL E500 S500 S500E F500J D700 F700PJ 15 7 FREQROL E700 15 10 INVERTER CONNECTION 15 1 Inverter Side Settings 15 34 L LCPU CC Link connection 14 8 Computer link connection 7 10 Direct connection to CPU 6 8 List of Models tha...

Page 855: ...connection to CPU 6 7 Ethernet connection 8 8 8 12 MELSECNET 10 connection PLC to PLC network 10 8 10 9 MELSECNET H connection PLC to PLC network 9 8 QnACPU type Bus connection 5 11 CC Link connection intelligent device station 13 7 Computer link connection 7 12 Direct connection to CPU 6 10 Ethernet connection 8 8 MELSECNET 10 connection PLC to PLC network 10 8 10 9 QnASCPU type Bus connection 5 ...

Page 856: ...onnection 12 8 CNC connection 18 3 Computer link connection 7 8 Direct connection to CPU 6 7 ENERGY MEASURING UNIT ELECTRIC MULTI MEASURING INSTRUMENT CONNECTION 19 3 Ethernet connection 8 8 FA transparent function 23 34 GOT MULTI DROP CONNECTION 20 16 INVERTER CONNECTION 15 3 MELSECNET 10 connection PLC to PLC network 10 8 MELSECNET H connection PLC to PLC network 9 8 MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 4 ...

Page 857: ...nection between GOT and personal computer compatible Apr 2011 SH NA 080868ENG H H edition Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 28E GT1655 V is added Jul 2011 SH NA 080868ENG I I edition Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 31H CC Link IE Field Network compatible Communication setting storage and error information notification in GOT multi drop connection compatible FA transparent MX Component in Ether...

Page 858: ...Component 4 03D compatible Jan 2014 SH NA 080868ENG T Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 108N FX3GE compatible FREQROL A800 F800 E700EX compatible MELSERVO JE compatible Apr 2014 SH NA 080868ENG U Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 112S Q24DHCCPU VG is supported Jun 2014 SH NA 080868ENG V Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 117X MELSEC iQ R series are supported Communication driver Serial MELSEC is...

Page 859: ...A 080868ENG AD Some corrections Jun 2017 SH NA 080868ENG AE Partial corrections This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual Print Date Manu...

Page 860: ...REVISIONS 4 ...

Page 861: ... in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product c Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged in the following cases Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range 1 1 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technic...

Page 862: ...ered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Intel Intel Core Pentium and Celeron are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA VNC is a registered trademark of RealVNC Ltd in the United States and other countries Other company an...

Page 863: ......

Page 864: ...ions subject to change without notice Printed in Japan June 2017 When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for GT15

Brand: Zenith Pages: 14

Brand: DAPAudio Pages: 12

Brand: Alpine Pages: 133

Brand: Jaycar Pages: 8

Brand: H2flow Pages: 16

Brand: Anker Pages: 19

Brand: Teufel Pages: 24

Brand: LENCO Pages: 66

Brand: Panasonic Pages: 24

Brand: Panasonic Pages: 24

Brand: Panasonic Pages: 28

Brand: Panasonic Pages: 32

Brand: Panasonic Pages: 20

Brand: Panasonic Pages: 24

Brand: Looperlative Pages: 29

Brand: DS Pages: 7

Brand: Iluv Pages: 36

Stealthbox SB-F-150-SPRCRW/13TW5v2

Brand: JL Audio Pages: 5

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands